diff options
Diffstat (limited to '21401.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 21401.txt | 7992 |
1 files changed, 7992 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/21401.txt b/21401.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ac2736 --- /dev/null +++ b/21401.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7992 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of In New Granada, by W.H.G. Kingston + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: In New Granada + Heroes and Patriots + +Author: W.H.G. Kingston + +Release Date: May 9, 2007 [EBook #21401] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK IN NEW GRANADA *** + + + + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + + + + +In New Granada, Heroes and Patriots, by W.H.G. Kingston. + +________________________________________________________________________ + +A story about some English people who were caught up in the wars of +independence from Spain of a small South American country. We are shown +life on the side of the Patriots fighting against the cruel rule of the +Spaniards. Our friends have for various reasons to travel from one end +of the country to the other, with various fights with the Spanish on the +way. + +There are numerous illustrations, but we are at first at least putting a +version without these onto the website. We very much hope that we will +find the opportunity of adding the pictures. + +Well written, as always from this author, you will find this book very +interesting. + +________________________________________________________________________ + +IN NEW GRANADA, HEROES AND PATRIOTS, BY W.H.G. KINGSTON. + + + +CHAPTER ONE. + +INTRODUCTORY--MY FATHER'S HISTORY--ENTERS THE NAVY AS A SURGEON--LEARNS +SPANISH--APPOINTED TO THE "ZEBRA," IN THE PACIFIC--TAKES DICKY DUFF +UNDER HIS CHARGE--A SHOOTING EXPEDITION ON SHORE--CAPTURED BY SPANIARDS +ON COAST OF GUATEMALA WITH DICKY AND PAUL LORO--CARRIED TO PANAMA--MEETS +AN OLD FRIEND, WHO TAKES HIM TO GUAYAQUIL--VISIT LOJA TO INSPECT +PERUVIAN BARK--MEETS DR. CAZALLA--ACCOMPANIES HIM TO POPAYAN--HE MARRIES +MISS CAZALLA, WHO BECOMES MY MOTHER; AND RICHARD DUFFIELD MARRIES HER +NIECE, AN HEIRESS--THEY BOTH SETTLE AT POPAYAN. + +The circumstances which led my father, Dr Andrew Sinclair, to settle in +New Granada--the land of my birth--are of so romantic a character, that +I cannot better preface an account of my own adventures in that country +than by narrating them. + +My grandfather, Duncan Sinclair, after whom I was named, was a member of +an old Covenanter family in Dumfriesshire, and was the parent of six +sons,--all of whom, with the exception of the eldest, who inherited the +estate, had to seek their fortune in the world. My father was his +fourth son. Having gone through a medical course at the University of +Edinburgh, where he gained not only a knowledge of his profession, but +of science generally, he entered the Royal Navy as an assistant-surgeon, +and was ultimately promoted to the rank of surgeon. Among his many +other talents, he possessed that of acquiring foreign languages, and he +spoke French and Spanish remarkably well; though at the time he learned +the latter--from a wounded Spanish prisoner, whose life was saved by his +skill--he little thought how useful it would prove to him. After +visiting many parts of the world, adding greatly to his store of +information, he was appointed to the _Zebra_ sloop-of-war of eighteen +guns, which soon after sailed for the Pacific. + +Among the youngsters on board was a midshipman named Richard Duffield,-- +generally known, however, as Dicky Duff. He was the orphan son of an +old messmate, who had been killed in action. The brave lieutenant's +last thoughts, as he lay mortally wounded in the cockpit, the guns still +thundering overhead, were about his son. + +"The boy's mother is dead, and when I am gone he'll not have a friend in +the world. Doctor, will you look after him? I know you will!" + +"Don't let any doubt about that trouble you. I'll act a father's part +towards your boy as well as I am able," was the answer. + +My father faithfully fulfilled his promise; and when the boy was old +enough, he got him placed on the quarter-deck, and generally managed to +take him to sea with himself. Richard Duffield was grateful for the +kindness shown him, and became much attached to his protector, with whom +he had many tastes in common. + +My father, whenever he had an opportunity, was in the habit of going on +shore with his gun, to obtain specimens of the birds and beasts of the +country; while he also frequently brought off a bag of game for the +benefit of the commander and his own messmates. On such occasions he +was generally accompanied by Dicky Duff, who had become as good a +sportsman as himself. + +On one occasion, when the _Zebra_ was off the coast of Guatemala in +Central America, my father, having obtained a boat from the commander, +left the ship, taking with him Dicky Duff, and their constant attendant, +Paul Lobo, an African seaman, and a crew of six men. No inhabitants +appearing, the boat was hauled up on the beach, and the crew amused +themselves at leap-frog and other games, while my father and his two +attendants proceeded some way inland. Having had very good sport, and +filled their bags, my father sent back the midshipman and Paul to the +boat with the game, while he continued shooting, hoping to obtain some +more birds. + +He had been thus employed for some time, and was thinking of returning, +when the sound of several shots reached his ears. These were followed +by a regular volley, and he had too much reason to fear that the +inhabitants had attacked the boat. Instead, therefore, of returning to +her, he made his way directly towards the shore. Emerging from the +forest, which reached almost to the water's edge, he saw the boat at +some distance off, with a party of men on the beach firing at her. His +hope was that Dicky and Paul had already got on board before the boat +shoved off. The distance was considerable, but still he hoped to be +able to swim to her; so, leaving his gun and ammunition, with the game +he had shot, under a tree, he plunged into the water. He had got some +distance from the shore when he found that he was discovered, by seeing +a shot strike the water not far from him. On looking round, what was +his dismay to perceive Dicky and Paul in the hands of the Spaniards! He +could not desert them, and consequently he at once turned and swam back, +hoping that by explaining their object in visiting the shore he might +obtain their release. But no sooner did he land than the Spaniards +rushed down and seized him. In vain he expostulated. "He and his +companions belonged to a ship of war, and they wished to be able to +boast that they had made three prisoners." They told him, however, that +if he would make signals to the boat to return, they would give him and +his younger companions their liberty. On his refusing to act so +treacherously, they became very angry, and bound his hands behind him, +as well as those of Dicky and Paul. The seamen at once pulled back to +the ship, when the captain sent a flag of truce on shore to try and +recover his surgeon and midshipman; but the Spaniards refused to give +them up. + +After being kept prisoners for some time, they were sent down to Panama. +Here, though strictly guarded, they were not ill-treated; and when it +became known that my father was a surgeon, many persons, of all ranks, +applied to him for advice. He was thus the means of effecting several +cures, by which he obtained numerous friends. Indeed, he might here +have established a good practice, and have comfortably supported himself +and his companions; but he was anxious, for Dicky's sake especially, to +return with him to the ship. There was no place, however, nearer than +Cartagena, at which it was customary to exchange prisoners; and how to +get to it, was the difficulty. + +He had been kept a prisoner for some months, when, passing through the +streets, he met his old acquaintance, Don Tomaso Serrano, from whom, +while Don Tomaso was a prisoner on board his ship, he had learned +Spanish. They immediately recognised each other, and expressed their +pleasure at meeting. Don Tomaso, on hearing what had befallen my +father, told him that he was in command of a man-of-war schooner, and +was about to proceed in her to the southward. "Although I cannot obtain +your liberty," he said, "I have sufficient influence to get leave for +you and your companions to come on board my vessel and proceed with me +as far as Guayaquil. I have friends there, whom I hope to interest in +your favour; and by their influence you will, I hope, be able to obtain +permission to land and travel across the country to Honda, from whence +you can make your way down the river to Cartagena. It is a round-about +route, but it may prove the shortest in the end. You will have an +opportunity, too, of seeing a beautiful region; and you cannot fail, I +am sure, to be hospitably treated wherever you go." + +My father at once closed with Don Tomaso's offer, and was allowed to go +on board the schooner, accompanied by Dicky and Paul. Having obtained a +considerable sum of money, he was able to dress both of them, as well as +himself, in Spanish costume, so that they did not attract attention; and +as both he and Paul spoke Spanish perfectly, they were generally taken +for natives. Though still prisoners, the party were treated with the +greatest kindness, and enjoyed as much liberty as they could desire. + +Heavy weather coming on, the schooner ran into the port of Buenaventura. +Beyond the bay, opening into it, is a lagoon of considerable extent. +On one side is the town, a great part of which is built on piles at the +water's edge. The place has but little to recommend it; indeed, there +are scarcely a dozen houses of any size, while the rest of the buildings +have a miserable appearance both without and within. Above the town +stands the church,--a building of no architectural pretensions, and +greatly resembling a barn. Buenaventura is the port of a considerable +district, embracing the valley of the Cauca. The climate, however, +owing to the constant damp and heat, which produce intermittent fevers, +prevents foreigners from residing here; indeed, it rains nearly every +day in the year. + +Most of my father's time on shore was occupied in visiting persons +suffering from ague, and in prescribing for them. What a blessing, +indeed, can a clever medical man prove in such regions! He is like a +heaven-sent messenger carrying relief to the sick and suffering. + +The weather moderating, the schooner continued her voyage, and at length +reached Guayaquil, the port of Quito, to the south of which it is +situated, at the head of the Gulf of Guayaquil. Here Don Tomaso proved +as good as his word, and obtained leave from the governor for my father +to travel with his attendants through the country. + +While on shore at Guayaquil, he heard that in the region of the little +town of Loja, three days' journey off, grew in the greatest profusion +the cinchona, or Peruvian bark tree, at that time but comparatively +little known in Europe. Although my father was well acquainted with the +beneficial effect produced by the bark in cases of intermittent fever, +he was anxious to ascertain, by personal examination, the other +peculiarities of the tree. He obtained leave, therefore, from the +governor, to proceed in the first instance to Loja. That place he +reached without difficulty. On his arrival in the town, he found that a +Spanish doctor was residing there for the same object, but that he was +now laid up by a severe attack of illness, unable to continue his +researches. My father immediately called on him, and found that he was +no other than Doctor Cazalla, a physician widely celebrated for his +scientific knowledge and talents. Introducing himself as a medical man, +my father offered to prescribe for his brother physician, and in a short +time had the satisfaction of restoring him to health. The two doctors +then set out together on an expedition of botanical research, in which +both Dicky and Paul accompanied them. + +The time thus spent together having resulted in the establishment of a +warm friendship between my father and the Spanish doctor, the latter +prevailed upon him to visit Popayan, his native place, on the way to +Cartagena. Their journey over that mountain region amid which +Chimborazo towers to the sky, was interesting in the extreme. I have +often heard my father speak of it. Popayan was at length safely +reached, with the botanical treasures they had collected; and here my +father was induced to remain for some time, in order to assist his +friend in their arrangement. Before their labours came to an end, my +father and Dicky were taken seriously ill. It now became the turn of +the Spanish doctor to attend to them. He, however, was aided in his +task by two ladies,--his sister and a young niece; the latter taking +Dicky under her special charge. The result was that my father married +the doctor's sister, and Dicky fell desperately in love with his niece. +The war with Spain was by this time over, and the _Zebra_ had returned +to England, so my father and his young charge, believing that they had +little prospect of getting on in the navy, determined to remain where +they were. As Doctor Cazalla was engrossed in scientific pursuits, he +gladly yielded up his practice to my father, his brother-in-law, whose +fame as a physician was soon established in the town and throughout the +surrounding district. + +Richard Duffield, for I ought now to give him his proper name, in the +course of a few years married Dona Maria, the girl who had so +affectionately tended him, and who proved to be the heiress to a nice +estate in the neighbourhood, to the improvement of which, when he became +the proprietor, Richard devoted his time and attention; while Paul Lobo +remained with my father as his personal attendant and general factotum. + + + +CHAPTER TWO. + +OUR STUDIES INTERRUPTED--DON JUAN DE LEON--A RIDE TO VISIT DON RICARDO, +ACCOMPANIED BY HUGH AND OUR TUTOR, MR. LAFFAN--DESCRIPTION OF POPAYAN-- +TYRANNICAL TREATMENT OF NEW GRANADA AND VENEZUELA BY THE SPANIARDS-- +PREVIOUS STRUGGLES OF THE COLONISTS FOR LIBERTY--FEARFUL CRUELTIES +INFLICTED ON THEM BY THE SPANIARDS--MY UNCLE, DR. CAZALLA, A KNOWN +LIBERAL--HIS DANGEROUS POSITION--HOW MR. LAFFAN BECAME OUR TUTOR--JUAN +EXPATIATES ON THE PERFECTIONS OF DONA DOLORES, AND INVITES ME TO +ACCOMPANY HIM ON A VISIT--PASS A PARTY OF INDIANS--DON RICARDO'S +HACIENDA--FRUITS OF NEW GRANADA--INVITED TO STAY--JUAN, OUR TUTOR, AND I +SERENADE DONA DOLORES--THE INTERVIEW--DONA DOLORES ENDEAVOURS TO AROUSE +JUAN'S PATRIOTISM--MUSIC VICTORIOUS--A HEROINE--JUAN DEVOTES HIMSELF TO +THE CAUSE OF FREEDOM. + +"Holloa! mio amigo Senor Duncan, come down! I want to have a talk with +you. You can spare a few minutes from your books." + +Leaving the table at which I was seated with my brother Hugh and our +tutor, Mr Michael Laffan, I went to the window, which looked out into +the court of our house at Popayan, when I saw that the person who had +hailed me was our friend Don Juan de Leon. He had just ridden in, +mounted on a fine black horse, his special pride; and as he gracefully +sat his steed, he looked a remarkably handsome young fellow. His +costume, too,--a broad-brimmed sombrero, a feather secured to it by a +jewelled buckle, a richly-trimmed poncho or capote over his shoulders, +broad leggings, ornamented with braiding and tags, and large silver +spurs,--became him well. + +"Come down, Duncan, I want to speak to you," he said, beckoning to me. + +Having obtained permission, I descended to the courtyard with a hop, +skip, and jump. After shaking hands, I begged him to come in, as I was +sure the ladies of my family would be glad to see him. + +"I have no time now," he answered; "I hope to pay my respects +to-morrow." + +"What have you to say to me?" I asked. + +"I want you to come with me to visit your friends Don Ricardo and Dona +Maria at Egido. You can easily obtain a holiday from Senor Miguel. As +the ride is a long one, I shall be glad of your companionship. You will +have no objection either, I am sure, to enjoying the bright smiles of +your sweet little cousin, Dona Rosa, their daughter." + +Don Ricardo, I should explain, was our old friend Richard Duffield; and +Senor Miguel was Mr Michael Laffan, our tutor. + +"She is not my cousin, though we are both half British, and our fathers +are old friends. But confess, Juan, that you have another object in +going to Egido. You will have no objection either to pay a visit on +your way to Dona Dolores Monteverde, and to bask in her sweet smiles," I +rejoined, repeating his words. "However, as Mr Laffan would say, +`Amicus certus in re incerta, cerniter' (A true friend is discovered in +a doubtful matter), I shall be very glad to accompany you, and be of any +service in my power, if I can obtain leave." + +"Thank you, Duncan. Go then and obtain leave, although I thought you +were old enough to act as you might think fit in a matter of this sort," +said Juan. "I have a little commission to perform at the other end of +the town, and will shortly return for you. You are sure to obtain +leave, so I can depend upon having your company." + +Lighting a cigarillo, he rode off down the street. My father was out, +so I went to my mother in order to have her sanction, in case Mr Laffan +should prove obdurate. Juan was a favourite of hers, as well as of +everybody who knew him, so when I told her of his request she made no +objection. + +"Then I'll tell Mr Laffan that I have your leave," I observed. + +"And that you have mine too," exclaimed my young sister Flora; "for I +want you to carry a packet to Rosa, and a note with my love, and tell +her she must come here soon and stay with us." + +While I ordered my horse, and put on my riding costume, Flora wrote and +sealed her note, which I promised faithfully to deliver with the packet +she entrusted to my care. On going to Mr Laffan to beg that he would +excuse me from my studies for a few hours, he exclaimed, looking out of +the window-- + +"It's a mighty fine day. Hugh and I will be ready to take a ride with +you. I can instruct him in orthography, geography, botany, and the +natural sciences, as we go along." + +Hugh was delighted to go, and undertook duly to receive all the +instruction our worthy tutor could impart to him on the way. Though my +brother was still very young, he was a capital horseman, and would make +nothing of riding a dozen leagues or more in a day. I was in doubt, +however, whether Juan would be particularly pleased to have Mr Laffan's +company; but such an idea never occurred to our good tutor, who was not +inconveniently troubled with bashfulness. I knew, however, that he +would be welcomed at the house of Don Ricardo, who esteemed him for his +many sterling qualities. + +Hugh and Mr Laffan were ready almost as soon as I was, and when Juan +returned we were all three mounted in the courtyard, prepared to +accompany him. + +"I did not know that you were coming, Mr Laffan," he said, lifting his +hat and bowing politely; "but it will afford me great pleasure to have +your society." + +Our tutor replied in wonderfully curious Spanish, into which he could +not help occasionally introducing a few Irishisms, for the purpose, as +he used to say, of adding pepper to his remarks. + +Without delay we set off, Juan and I riding together, Mr Laffan and +Hugh following; and I saw by our tutor's gestures, after we got clear of +the town, that, faithful to his promise, he was imparting information in +his usual impressive manner, which Hugh was endeavouring with all his +might to take in. + +While we ride along, I will describe the region and the city in which I +was born, and some of the principal events which had occurred since my +father settled there, up to the present time. + +In the western half of New Granada are three ranges of lofty mountains, +into which the main branch of the Andes is divided, extending from Quito +northwards to the Caribbean Sea; a fourth branch, running close to the +shores of the Pacific, extends towards the Isthmus of Panama. These +four ranges form three valleys, elevated, however, a considerable +distance above the sea. Throughout that to the east runs the +magnificent river Magdalena; the next is watered by the Cauca, of equal +length; and the third valley by the Atrato, of less extent, which runs +into the Gulf of Darien. At the head of the centre valley--that of the +Cauca--is situated Popayan, the capital of the province of the same +name, in the midst of a beautiful plain, almost surrounded by two +streams, which finish their course about a league below it, when they +fall into the fine river Cauca. This river then runs to the northward +through the rich and charming valley of the Cauca. Nothing can be more +delicious than the climate of this region, the inhabitants being never +oppressed by excessive heat, or annoyed by extreme cold. Rain, however, +falls during the last three months of the year, and also in April and +May; but even at that period the mornings are fine, as the showers +seldom come on until two or three o'clock in the afternoon, and continue +during the night. The plain, or I may call it the wide valley of +Popayan, lies between two ranges of lofty mountains. On one side are +the Cordilleras, with Purace, eternally covered with snow, rising above +them; and on the west side is another range, which separates the valley +from the province of Buenaventura. In the midst, surrounded by trees, +appears Popayan, with its numerous churches and large convents, +distinguished at a considerable distance by their whiteness. It is one +of the most ancient towns in that part of the continent. Its founders, +companions of Sebastian Belalcazar, made it the capital of the province, +establishing a bishopric, a college, and numerous religious +institutions. Although its buildings might not be greatly admired in +Europe, the inhabitants are proud of them; and justly so, when the +difficulties under which they were erected are remembered. Every +article used in their construction had to be brought either on the backs +of men or mules; and there were few native craftsmen capable of +performing the necessary work. Many families proud of their ancient +descent were settled in the town, and its society was therefore superior +to that of any of the surrounding places. In Popayan is a large square, +of which I shall have to speak by-and-by, with the cathedral on one +side, and the residences of some of the principal people in the town +occupying the other sides. There were, besides, several churches, four +convents, and two nunneries. To the north of the city, towards the +Cauca, is the handsomest bridge in that part of the country. From the +town, in the early part of the morning, when the sun shines on them, can +be seen the Cordilleras of Chicquio, and at a less distance rises the +Paramos of Puxana and Soltana, presenting a magnificent appearance. + +This description may give a faint idea of the beautiful scenery amid +which I was born. Although I was accustomed to it from my earliest +days, I nevertheless admired it more and more as I grew older. Though +my father and Richard Duffield had not intended to settle in America +when they married, their wives, who were attached to the country, +exerted all their influence to induce them to stay, so they finally made +up their minds to abandon their native land. The doctor, having been so +long a prisoner, was supposed to be dead, and he had no difficulty in +retiring from the service; while the midshipman very easily discharged +himself. + +At the time I speak of, Liberal principles had been making rapid +progress in the country among persons of all ranks. For years the +colony had groaned under the tyranny and narrow-minded policy of the +mother country. As she produced wine, oil, and silk, the inhabitants of +New Granada and Venezuela were not allowed to cultivate either the vine, +the olive, or the mulberry, under the idea that they would thus be +compelled to consume the produce of Spain. Attempts were made from time +to time to establish manufactories, which were invariably destroyed by +the orders of the Spanish Government. At length, when Spain herself +became enslaved by the French, the colonists took the opportunity of +throwing off the galling yoke, and New Granada and Venezuela declared +their independence. The Spanish standard was cut down and destroyed, +while the tricoloured flag was hoisted in numerous towns and fortresses. +The inhabitants of the two vice-royalties flew to arms, and, under the +leadership of General Miranda, the Royalists were defeated in Venezuela. +No sooner, however, had Spain been liberated by the success of the +British arms over Napoleon's generals in the Peninsula, than she made +use of her recovered liberty again to enthral the hapless colonists. +Simon Bolivar, who had hitherto taken no active part in the revolution, +was at length won over to espouse the cause of Freedom; and a congress +having been assembled at Caracas to organise a new Government for the +state of Venezuela, he proceeded to England for the purpose of +endeavouring to induce the British Cabinet to aid the cause of Liberty. +Finding, however, that the English had resolved on maintaining a strict +neutrality, though they had ample excuses for interfering in the cause +of humanity, he returned in disgust to Caracas. + +Sometimes success attended the Patriot arms, sometimes the Royalists +were victorious. At length a dreadful earthquake occurred. I remember +it well. Fear was inspired by the terrible destruction it caused to +life and property. In the three cities of Caracas, La Guayra, and +Merida, twenty thousand persons perished. The priests, monks, and +friars, who in general were the main supporters of Spanish tyranny, +knowing that with the advancement of Liberal principles their power +would be decreased, if not overthrown, declared this catastrophe to be a +judgment on the revolutionists. About twelve hundred of the Royalist +prisoners who were confined in the fortress of Puerto Cabello, of which +Bolivar was then commandant, having broken loose, murdered some of the +garrison, and by the treachery of the officer on guard took possession +of the citadel. Bolivar, with a band of followers, narrowly escaped +destruction; and General Miranda, who was at Vittoria, on hearing that +this important place, with all its stores, arms, and ammunition, was +deserted, capitulated in despair to Monteverde, the Royalist general; +and being sent in irons to Spain, he there died--shortly afterwards--in +a dungeon. + +The whole country was now once more entirely in the hands of the +Royalists, who inflicted the most fearful cruelties on the hapless +inhabitants. On pretexts the most trivial, old men, women, and children +were arrested, their houses plundered, and they themselves maimed in the +most horrible way, or massacred as rebels. + +I have been speaking chiefly of Venezuela. The Liberals in New Granada +suffered similar reverses; but, in consequence of the inaccessible +nature of many parts of the country, the Patriots, although defeated, +were able to take refuge in positions from which they could not be +driven by the Spaniards; and many, under various leaders, remained in +arms, prepared for the moment when they might again attack the Royalists +with a prospect of success, and drive them, as they had vowed to do, +from the country. + +The bloodthirsty monster, General Murillo, had at this time his +headquarters at Santa Fe de Bogota, the capital of New Granada. Our own +city of Popayan had not altogether escaped, but it was at present +comparatively tranquil, though people lived in dread of what a day might +bring forth. Murillo was attempting to stamp out Liberal principles by +the destruction of every man of science and education in the country, +being well aware that ignorance and superstition were the strongest +supporters of Spanish tyranny. My father, as a medical man and an +English subject, hoped to escape annoyance; though our uncle, Dr +Cazalla, owing to his known Liberal principles and scientific +attainments, was well aware that his position was critical in the +extreme. Though on his guard, he was too bold to fly. My father often +urged him to leave the country, but his reply was, "I will remain, to +forward, by every means in my power, the cause of liberty, and endeavour +to advance the true liberties of the people among whom I live." My +father steadily pursued his professional duties, attending equally on +the Royalists and Liberals, by both of whom he was highly esteemed,-- +though those who knew him best were well aware that his sympathies were +all on the side of Freedom. + +However, my object is not so much to describe the political events which +occurred in the country, as to narrate my own adventures, and those of +my relatives and friends. My father had often intended to send my +brother and me to England for our education; but my mother was unwilling +to part with us, and suggested, instead, that an English tutor should be +procured, who would give us the instruction we required. My father +remarked that it was not only the knowledge we should obtain by going to +England which would prove of value, but the training and general +education we should receive at an English school. He had made up his +mind to act as he thought best, notwithstanding our mother's objections, +when he was called in to visit an English traveller who had lately +arrived at Popayan, accompanied by a secretary--Mr Laffan--for whom he +seemed to entertain a warm regard. His malady increased, and my father +soon saw that his hours were numbered, and told him so. The dying man +acknowledged that his funds were nearly exhausted; that he was waiting +remittances from England, but that it might be long before they arrived, +if they ever came at all; and he was greatly concerned as to what would +become of his attendant, who would thus be left in a foreign country +without the means of leaving it, or of obtaining support. My father had +not been favourably impressed by the appearance of Mr Laffan, who was +tall and gaunt, with awkward manners and ungainly figure; but after some +conversation he found him to be a man of considerable attainments and +intelligence, and apparently thoroughly honest and trustworthy. + +On the death of the unfortunate gentleman, my father found his companion +plunged in the deepest grief. + +"He was my best friend, sir, the truest I ever had in the world; and now +he's gone and left me all alone among savages, or little better, by the +way they murder each other; and we may call them heathens, too, when we +see them bow down to stocks and stones." + +My father, feeling for the poor man, inquired whether he would be +willing to act as tutor to two boys. On receiving this proposal, Mr +Laffan started up and pressed my father's hand, and while the tears ran +down his cheeks, assured him that he would gladly devote his life and +energies to the task, hoping that my father would have no cause to +regret having entrusted us to his charge. + +Having seen his former patron placed in the grave, Mr Laffan took up +his abode in our house, and well and faithfully fulfilled the duties he +had undertaken--although, it must be confessed, in a somewhat curious +fashion--and we soon became as much attached to him, I believe, as he +was to us. He gave us not only mental, but physical training; for, in +spite of his gaunt figure, he was a first-rate horseman, and thoroughly +understood the sword-exercise, a practical knowledge of which he +imparted to us. He was a good shot and a keen sportsman; and although +he seldom spoke of himself, he had, I discovered, seen a good deal of +service, and had honourable wounds to show. He was a devoted Liberal, +and detested tyranny in every shape and form. As may be supposed, we +admired his principles, which, indeed, were those of our father and +uncle, and all the members of our mother's family. + +As I have said, Juan and I rode on, while Mr Laffan and Hugh followed +close behind us. Our road lay between lanes bordered by hedges of the +prickly pear, and gardens filled with fruit trees of every description; +while before us rose the Cordilleras, adding much to the beauty of the +scenery. Before we had ridden far, Don Juan confessed to me that, +besides paying a promised visit to my friends, his object was to see +Dona Dolores. + +"She is beautiful and good, and full of sense and spirit, so unlike the +greater number of my countrywomen," he exclaimed; "I believe there is +nothing that she would not dare and do." + +"I quite believe all you say of her, Juan," I answered; though I confess +I did not admire the young lady quite as much as my friend did. +According to my taste, her manner was somewhat too determined and +forward--shall I call it?--although I could not exactly say that she was +masculine in her appearance, or wanting in feminine attractions; and I +had no doubt that she could be soft and tender on occasion. + +"But does Dona Dolores return your love?" I asked. + +"I hope so; I have no reason to believe that she dislikes me," he +answered, "though I own that she treats me sometimes as if I were a mere +boy. But perseverance conquers all difficulties. My great desire is to +convince her of the sincerity of my affection, and that I am worthy of +her love." + +"I should think that she would soon be convinced of that," I observed, +looking up at Juan, of whom I thought a great deal; he was a man, I +fancied, to whom any girl would willingly give her heart. + +"I have determined to visit her to-day, after paying my respects to Don +Ricardo and Dona Maria, and to learn my fate. Will you accompany me, +Duncan? I dare say that, if I give you a sign, you will find an excuse +for leaving us together while I plead my cause." + +I, of course, said that I was perfectly ready to do as Juan wished, +although I did not think my presence would be necessary. + +We had got more than half-way to Egido, when we overtook a large party +of Indians returning from Popayan to their own village. At their head +marched one of their number playing the tabor and pipes, to which they +kept admirable time. The men were a remarkably fine-looking set of +fellows; and the women were handsome, with good figures. The former, +who carried long lances, wore kilts, and on their heads blue cloth caps +trimmed with scarlet, ornamented with gold lace somewhat the worse for +wear. Their bearing, also, was bold and independent. They saluted Don +Juan in a familiar way, and he laughed and joked with them as we passed +by. + +"These men would make good soldiers, if they could be got to join the +Liberal cause," observed Mr Laffan. + +"But you'll not get them while they live under the influence of their +priests," answered Juan. "The friars try to persuade the people that +the Liberals are in league with Satan, and that if they join them they +will do so at the peril of their souls. They eyed you three very +suspiciously," he continued; "for the friars tell them that all +Englishmen have tails, like monkeys, and horns on their heads, and that +they are addicted to eating babies when they can get a supply." + +"You should try and disabuse them of such notions, Don Juan," said Mr +Laffan. + +"I!--it is no business of mine. I let the people think as they like--it +does no harm." + +"It always does harm to allow people to believe a falsehood, and we +should oppose it with truth," observed Mr Laffan. + +Don Juan laughed, and commenced trolling forth a jovial song as we rode +along, as if he did not like to be lectured by our tutor. + +On arriving at the hacienda, we found that Don Ricardo was out; but Dona +Maria received us very kindly, and servants immediately came forward to +take charge of our horses. My little cousin Rosa, as we always called +her, received me with smiles as I delivered Flora's package, and gave +her the message she had sent. She was a beautiful blue-eyed girl, with +a rich colour, inheriting the naturally fair complexion of her father, +with her mother's beauty; for Dona Maria was one of the prettiest of the +young people in that part of the country--still looking almost like a +girl. Without inquiring whether we would have them, she immediately +ordered the usual refreshments, wine, cake, and fruit, with some cups of +coffee, to be placed on the table; to which, after our ride, we did +ample justice. Mr Laffan complimented Dona Maria on the fruits +produced on the estate. Indeed, when I afterwards left my native +valley, I learned to appreciate them, by comparison with the productions +of other regions. Nothing, indeed, can surpass the flavour of the +chirimoya, a fruit sometimes double the size of a cocoa-nut, tasting +like a mixture of strawberries, cream, and sugar, with a fragrance far +superior to any mixture. Then the caymato (in shape like a lemon, but +far sweeter, with scarcely a touch of the acidity of the lemon), a +species of lime, and the pomegranates, oranges, and strawberries, one of +which was a mouthful, and figs unsurpassed in any other country. Then +there was the mamei, a fruit as large as a water-melon, very nice, +fresh, and not to be despised when preserved. Then there were several +sorts of pine apples, and a variety of melons. Indeed, the climate of +this region is especially favourable to the production of fruit, as the +thermometer seldom falls below 68 degrees, and never rises much above 76 +degrees. Then the wine and the lemonade were delightfully cooled by +ice; an ample supply of snow being constantly brought down from the +mountain of Purace, distant little more than a day's journey. + +In a short time Don Ricardo came in, and welcomed us in a hearty, +sailor-like fashion. He still retained his nautical manners and +appearance, as well as his seamanlike habits. He was broad-shouldered, +of moderate height, with a fine brow and an open countenance, and the +light blue eye of the Anglo-Saxon. We always called him Uncle Richard, +and he treated us as his nephews. + +"You'll stop, now you have come," he said, shaking us all by the hand; +"I've been looking for you for many a day. We must have some hunting +and shooting. I will send over and let your father know that I have +laid an embargo on you, so that he must not expect you until you appear. +You can study as hard as you like in the evening, or whenever we are in +the house, and Mr Laffan will give you lectures on natural history +while we are on our excursions. Juan, mio amigo, you must remain also; +we have plenty of room, and can hang up a dozen hammocks, or fifty for +that matter; I have hooks provided on purpose in the hall." + +Juan did not even make a show of refusing, for fear that the invitation +might not be pressed. I suspect that Uncle Richard was well aware of +his admiration for Dona Dolores, who was a distant cousin of Dona +Maria's. She was an only daughter, and heiress of a fair estate close +to Egido. + +Mr Laffan making no objection, Don Ricardo despatched a messenger, as +he had promised, to our father, and we remained with clear consciences. + +The house itself, I may here say, was a long low building, of two +stories only in one portion, round which ran a broad verandah. It +possessed no pretensions to architectural beauty, but was very neat and +comfortable inside, and even elegant on the garden front. + +Before dinner Don Ricardo took us out to see the gardens and farm. In +the former, the fruits I have already described were growing in +profusion, besides vegetables of all sorts. In one direction spread out +fields of Indian corn of luxuriant growth. In the meadows were cattle +and sheep with beautiful white fleeces and long tails, while numbers of +horses were seen galloping about at liberty. + +"I sincerely hope the Spaniards will not pay a visit to this place," +observed Mr Laffan to me, as Uncle Richard and Juan were walking on +ahead; "they would soon make a clean sweep of these cattle and the +corn-fields." + +This estate was only one of many others of a similar character scattered +over the country, but probably Egido benefited by the energy and +perseverance of its owner. My father used to remark, that Dona Maria +was twice as rich as she would have been had she married a countryman +with an estate double the size of her own. The people also were well +looked after, having nice cottages, well thatched, and kept clean and +tidy. Uncle Richard's plan was to go about giving prizes to those who +had the best-kept huts. He had a school for the children, too, where +they were taught to read the Bible, notwithstanding the objection at +first raised by the parish priest--who was, however, at length induced +to read it himself. He one day came to Uncle Richard and acknowledged +it to be the best book for all who could read. Although the honest +padre at first sided with the oppressors of his country, he now became +an earnest Liberal, but avoided taking any open part in politics, and +confined himself to instructing the people. Uncle Richard was no +theologian, and had never had an argument in his life with Padre +Vincente. His custom was simply to open the Bible and point to certain +parts, and say, "Read that; if this book was written by God's command-- +and I am sure it was--that's what he says, not I." Padre Vincente might +not have called himself a Protestant, but he certainly preached the +gospel, and the people under his charge were the best conducted and +happiest in the neighbourhood. + +On our return to the house, we found dinner ready. Dona Maria, during +our absence, had been busy superintending its preparation; and if the +table did not groan with delicacies, the feast was as good a one as we +could have desired to eat. Mr Laffan, Hugh, and I showed, at all +events, that we enjoyed it, though Juan was unusually silent, and ate +but little. There was something on his mind, which came out after +dinner. + +"Duncan," he said, "I want you and Senor Laffan to assist me in giving +Dona Dolores a serenade, as soon as the shades of evening come on. You +sing, and he plays the guitar. I understand that Dona Dolores is fond +of music, although she tells me that I trifle away my time by practising +it." + +Uncle Richard laughed when Juan told him what he was going to do. "If I +were a bachelor I would accompany you, although such kind of singing as +yours is somewhat out of my way. I don't think, however, that the young +lady would be charmed by `Cease, rude Boreas,' `One night it blew a +hurricane,' `On board of the Arethusa,' or such other songs as I used to +sing afloat." + +We had no difficulty in procuring a couple of guitars. Juan took one, +Mr Laffan the other, and as soon as it began to grow dark we set out. +We soon approached the front of Dona Dolores' residence. It was a +two-storied building, with a balcony on one side overhanging the road +some little way from the entrance-gate. + +Juan and I were walking together, Mr Laffan bringing up the rear, when +suddenly the former stopped and grasped my arm. "I see some one on the +balcony," he whispered. "It must be she--how fortunate! She would +consider it rude to go away when once we begin; let us lose no time." + +We cautiously approached. + +"Suppose it is only her old duenna, Senora Ortes!" + +"Nonsense!" answered Juan. "I can discern the outline of her figure; no +other form can possess such grace." + +I thought that Juan's imagination assisted him in this respect, as I +could only just distinguish that a female was seated on the balcony. As +we drew near, however, I began to suspect that it was Dona Dolores +herself, but her head at the time was turned away, as if addressing some +one. + +Stepping softly, so that we might not be discovered until we at once +burst into song, we approached the house. Juan led the way; I kept +close under the wall, having no guitar; while Mr Laffan stood at a +little distance. Juan gave the signal, and we commenced the song. It +was in praise of a lady resembling Dona Dolores in all particulars, and +the love and devotion of one whose affection she had won, but appeared +to regard with disdain. + +Dona Dolores--for it was she--leaned her head on her hand as she +listened to the music, which was such as to attract any female ear. I +will not speak of my own powers; but Juan's voice was full and rich-- +indeed, he was one of the best singers I ever heard; and Mr Laffan did +his part on the guitar. + +We had continued for some time, when Dona Dolores leaned forward and +said, "I will not pretend to be ignorant as to who you are. You desire +to speak with me; and I am willing to see you. You are welcome to come +in, with your young friend, whose voice I recognise." + +Don Juan poured out his thanks, and expressed his readiness to take +advantage of the permission given him. + +Dona Dolores had said nothing of Mr Laffan; perhaps she had not +perceived him, or in the dark had mistaken him for me, as I had been +concealed under the wall--although our figures were very different. At +all events, it was very evident that he would be one too many. Of this +he was perfectly well aware himself, and as we went round to the front +entrance he whispered,--"I'll go back and tell Don Ricardo that you have +the honour of an interview, and will soon return;" and without another +word he hastened along the road. + +We made our way to the front gate, which was opened as we arrived by +Senora Ortes, who had been directed by her mistress to let us in. + +"Dona Dolores awaits you in her sitting-room," she said; "you are +welcome." + +She led the way into the house. We found Dona Dolores with a female +friend, somewhat older, seated in a well-furnished room, with a couple +of guitars on a sofa beside them. Some books were on a table, very +seldom to be seen in a lady's apartment in that country; while one of +the walls was ornamented with swords and daggers, guns and pistols-- +giving a somewhat odd appearance to a lady's boudoir. + +Dona Dolores looked handsomer than ever, and I could not be surprised +that she had won my friend's heart. She smiled as we approached and +saluted her. Don Juan having told her where we were staying, and a +little ordinary conversation having taken place, they both looked, I +thought, as if they wished that the other lady and I were at a distance. +We, at all events, supposing such to be the case, retired to the other +end of the room, to examine some artificial flowers, which the young +lady told me she had learned to make at the nunnery of the Encarnacion +at Popayan. She then confided to me that she had once intended to be a +nun, but, after a little experience of a conventual existence before she +had taken the vows, thought better of it, and had returned to her +friends; adding, "And perhaps some day I may accept a husband, should a +suitable one be presented to me." + +While we were speaking, she saw my eye directed towards the arms on the +walls. + +"They are all in good order, and intended to be used," she observed. +"My friend thinks it a good place to keep them in, as no one would +imagine that they were placed there otherwise than for ornament. The +time may come, however, and that before long, when they may do good +service to our country." + +Although my companion continued to speak, as if to engage my attention, +I could not help hearing the conversation that was going on between Don +Juan and Dona Dolores. In ardent tones he declared his love and +devotion, and vowed that his happiness in life depended on her becoming +his wife. + +"I will not deny, Don Juan, that I return the love you bestow on me; but +this arises from the weakness of my woman's nature. Notwithstanding +this, I tell you that nothing shall induce me to marry a man who is not +ready to sacrifice his life and property to obtain the enfranchisement +of our beloved country from the tyrannical yoke of her oppressors. You +have hitherto led an indolent life, regardless of the sufferings of our +people. Not until I see you boldly come forward and nobly devote +yourself to the cause of freedom, will I promise to become your wife. +When that freedom has been won, and the Spaniards, the hated Godos, have +been driven into the sea--" + +"But that may not be for many years, my beloved Dolores!" exclaimed Don +Juan; "am I to wait so long before I enjoy the unspeakable happiness of +calling you mine?" + +"If you and other young men of wealth and position in the country, who +ought to set the example to other classes, hang back, that glorious +object may never be accomplished, and I shall die a maiden; for I swear +to you I will never wed while our country remains enslaved," exclaimed +Dona Dolores in a firm tone. + +My companion's tongue here went rattling on at such a rate, that I did +not hear what more was said for some time; but it was evident that Dona +Dolores was expatiating on the duty of all patriots to struggle on, in +spite of every difficulty, until the power of the Spaniards was +overthrown. + +At length Don Juan exclaimed,--"Your arguments have prevailed, Dona +Dolores: from henceforth I will emerge from the useless life I have +hitherto led, and will devote my life to the cause of Freedom. You +shall have no reason to complain of your pupil. I trust that you will +hear of such deeds as you would have me do; and you may be sure that I +shall ever be found in the van of the battle, when the foe are to be +encountered. Your approval, and the reward I look for, will spur me on +to acts of valour." + +As he spoke I looked round. Dona Dolores had given him her hand, which +he was pressing to his lips; and I heard her say,--"I will trust you, +Juan; and you may rest assured that I will not depart from my promise." + +As my companion had no longer any excuse for remaining where we were, +she returned to the side of her friend. Dona Dolores had taken up her +guitar, and running her fingers over the strings, sang a few verses of a +patriotic song, which greatly affected Juan, and at the same time roused +in my heart a desire to take a part in the struggle for freedom in which +all classes throughout the country were eager to engage. It was +well-known that, when once it began, it would be to the knife, as the +Spanish generals showed no mercy to those who fell into their power-- +neither sex, rank, nor age were spared. As we spoke of the atrocities +which had been committed, the eyes of Dona Dolores flashed fire. She +pressed her lips together, and looked towards the wall on which the +weapons hung. + +"Every man and youth--ay, every woman who has a spark of patriotism-- +must take a part in the glorious work!" she exclaimed. Rising from her +seat, she took a sword from the wall. "Here, my Juan, let me gird you +with this weapon; and when once you draw it, swear that it shall never +again be sheathed until the standard of Liberty waves throughout the +length and breadth of the land, and every Spaniard is hurled into the +ocean which bore him to our shores." + +Don Juan, kissing the jewelled hilt of the weapon, swore as Dolores +wished, and with a triumphant smile she buckled it to his waist. + +My enthusiasm being aroused, I dare say I too looked as if I wished to +be presented with a sword. + +"You must wait a while," observed Dona Dolores, divining my thoughts; +"you are not yet your own master, and I would not compromise your +excellent father." + +The remark showed that the speaker possessed good sense and judgment as +well as patriotism. + +At last I reminded Juan that Don Ricardo would be expecting us, and we +took our leave of the two ladies--my admiration for Dona Dolores greatly +increased by the visit we had paid her. + +I expected that Juan would break out enthusiastically in her praise, but +he did not utter a word during our walk home; his thoughts were +evidently occupied by the new duties he had undertaken. He had hitherto +passed his time in superintending his mother's estate, or enjoying such +amusements as offered. He would now have to lead a life full of dangers +and hardships. + +"I congratulate you on finding Dona Dolores at home," observed Uncle +Richard when we arrived. + +"Yes, we had that honour," said Juan, endeavouring to hide the sword +which he had received--he had given me his to carry. I observed that he +placed it carefully against the wall, and covered it with his cloak. + +Supper was now announced, but Juan spoke very little during the meal. +Mr Laffan, however, conversed for all the party; rattling away, as he +could do when he had had a glass or two of good wine to raise his +spirits, and listening, apparently with rapt attention, to Uncle +Richard's sea stories and jokes, though he had heard them fifty times +before. Dona Maria, too, spoke English very fairly, having learned it +from her husband; and Juan could understand what was said, though he was +bashful about speaking. + +We retired at an early hour to our hammocks, as we were to start betimes +the next morning, on our expedition. + + + +CHAPTER THREE. + +A SHOOTING EXPEDITION--SNARING PARROQUETS--THE DOMINIE AND THE +TIGER-CAT--A DEER SHOT--THE DOMINIE PROVES THAT HE IS A MAN OF COURAGE-- +BLOW-PIPES AND POISONED ARROWS--A JAGUAR HUNT--STORIES ABOUT JAGUARS--A +FEARFUL THUNDERSTORM--THE STRICKEN TREE--REACH HOME--A DISCUSSION ON +LIBERTY--SET OUT ON A SECOND EXPEDITION--REACH A HOT SPRING--VISIT TO AN +OLD CACIQUE--THE LAST OF HIS RACE--PROMISES TO AID THE PATRIOT CAUSE-- +VINEGAR RIVER--THE DOMINIE TASTES THE WATER--UNCLE RICHARD'S FARM-- +RETURN HOMEWARDS--PAUL LOBO MEETS US WITH BAD NEWS--OUR NIGHT-RIDE TO +POPAYAN--DONA DOLORES ENLISTS THE DOMINIE--WE REACH POPAYAN-- +ARRANGEMENTS MADE FOR THE SAFETY OF OUR FAMILY--THE DOMINIE AND I REMAIN +WITH MY FATHER. + +I was in doubt whether Juan would accompany us. When I asked him, he +replied that he wished to have some conversation with Don Ricardo, and +that he should have an opportunity of speaking to him as we rode along. +Leaving our own horses in the stable, we were supplied instead with +active little mules, better calculated for climbing up and sliding down +the steep declivities. We had a dozen couples of dogs, not quite as +large as greyhounds, but of the same species. + +"They will run down any of the wild animals found in these forests, as +well as the danta, or wild ass--the black bear, red leopard, tiger-cat, +the deer, and fox; though it is necessary to follow them closely, since, +not being well broken-in, they will devour their prey, if they have an +opportunity, before the hunter comes up," observed Uncle Richard, as we +were about to start, our canine companions barking and yelping round us. + +We had not gone far when we saw an Indian in a large field of maize near +the road, engaged in snaring the red-headed, green parroquets, which are +here very numerous, and do much mischief to the crops of corn. The +snares are very simple, being composed of a line of horse-hair, a +slip-knot, and a loop, in the centre of which a little maize is +sprinkled as a bait. As soon as the bird pitches on the grain, the +Indian draws the line with a sudden jerk, and catches the bird by the +legs. Just as we arrived he had caught one, which Hugh cried out he +should like to have. On this the man brought it to him; but the bird +fought so vigorously to obtain its liberty, and gave Hugh so severe a +bite on the finger, that he was glad to let it go. + +We had dismounted in order to enjoy a draught of water from a fountain +which bubbled out of the hill-side, and to pluck some oranges from a +grove irrigated by it. Mr Laffan had gone to a little distance, and we +saw him stretching up to reach some fruit from a bough overhead, when he +uttered a cry, or rather a howl to which an Irishman alone can give +vent; and his foot slipping on a root which projected above the soil, +down he came stretched at full length. But he was not inclined to lie +long on the ground; and springing up, off he scampered. At the same +instant a tiger-cat leaped out of the tree; while a covey of partridges, +which had been nestling in the grass close by, rose with a loud "wurr," +still further alarming the dominie. + +"Get your guns! get your guns!" he shouted. "There's a huge tiger, or a +jaguar, or a beast of some sort, close at our heels; he'll be after +seizing some of us, if we are not on our guard." + +As he spoke we saw the tiger-cat, quite as much frightened as Mr +Laffan, scampering off in the opposite direction; and a hearty laugh, in +which we all indulged, assured our friend that no danger was to be +apprehended. Before we could get our guns ready, both partridges and +tiger-cat had disappeared. + +The air was pure and invigorating, and the scenery, made up of forests, +mountains, and streams, was magnificent. + +At length the dogs found a deer, to which, as it started off along the +side of the hill, we all gave chase. Over fallen logs, gullies, and +streams we galloped, finding it no easy matter to keep up with our +nimble four-footed companions. Juan was the most active among us; +holding his rifle in his hand ready for a shot, he at length got ahead. +I saw him lift his weapon and fire, and as he did so the deer leaped +several feet in the air and fell over dead. We soon had it flayed and +cut up, when it was placed on the back of one of the mules brought for +the purpose. + +Several other deer were started, and I had the satisfaction of killing +one with my own rifle; but Juan was the most successful. + +The dominie, although he did not at first quite recover his nerve, had +before long an opportunity of displaying his skill and courage. The +dogs, which were ahead, were heard barking loudly. + +"That's not deer," observed Uncle Richard; "it must be some savage +animal at bay." + +We were hurrying forward--having, I should have said, dismounted from +our mules--the dominie on this occasion leading, when, with a loud roar, +a huge jaguar leaped from its covert, scattering the dogs on either +side, and making directly toward us. Mr Laffan, dropping on his knee, +and holding his rifle like an infantry soldier about to receive a charge +of cavalry, waited until the jaguar was within twelve yards of him, when +he fired. The creature bounded on, and I trembled for our friend's +safety; but in an instant, rising, he sprang on one side, and drawing +his hunting-knife he struck it into the shoulder of the savage animal, +right up to the hilt, when the jaguar rolled over with one convulsive +struggle and was dead. + +We all congratulated the dominie on his skill and coolness. + +"I'm not in the habit of howling when I see a beast, but I was just now +thinking to pick an orange, when the tiger-cat sprang at my throat. +Faith! it was a little more than I bargained for," he answered, +laughing. + +"It is certainly what any of us would have done; though few would have +met a jaguar with the same coolness as you have exhibited," observed +Uncle Richard. + +We arrived at length at a neatly-thatched cottage near a hacienda, +belonging to a farmer who employed Indians chiefly in the cultivation of +his fields. He was absent, but an old Indian who had charge of the +house begged us to enter and consider it as our own. As the sun was +high and the heat increasing, we were glad to find shelter beneath its +roof. Here we spread the viands which had been brought in a pannier on +the back of one of the mules. + +Several of the Indians possessed blow-pipes, from which they projected +arrows not more than eight inches in length; and with these we saw them +bring down a number of parroquets and other birds in rapid succession. +Scarcely had a bird been touched than, after fluttering for a few +moments, it fell dead. The arrows, we found, were poisoned; and the +Indians told us that the poison was produced from the moisture which +exudes from the back of a small green frog. They declared that, to +obtain it, the frog was put near a fire, and in the moisture which +quickly appeared on its back they dipped the tips of their arrows. So +speedy is the poison, that even a jaguar or puma which has received the +slightest wound soon becomes convulsed and dies. Instead of feathers, a +little cotton is wrapped neatly round the lower end of the arrow, to +make it go steadily through the air: and at about an inch from the point +it is spiral. + +The major-domo told us that the farm, being at a distance from others, +was frequently attacked by jaguars, which carried off pigs, calves, and +sometimes even mules, although horses and the larger animals were +generally too wary for them. He took us to a remote spot, to show us a +trap which had been set for catching the jaguars. It was in a small +circular plot of ground, enclosed with strong stakes of considerable +height, to prevent the entrapped jaguar from breaking through or leaping +over. A doorway is left for the jaguar to enter. Above this is +suspended a large plank of wood communicating with one on the ground, +over which the jaguar on entering must tread, and it is so contrived +that as he does so the portcullis falls and shuts him in. A live pig is +fastened by a rope in the centre of the enclosure as a bait. An Indian +is always on the watch at night in a tree near the spot, and the moment +the jaguar is caught he gives the alarm, and his companions assemble and +despatch it with firearms and lances. Previous to our visit, a male and +female jaguar had been caught together, but before the labourers could +assemble they had almost eaten up the poor pig. + +As we had already as much venison as we could carry, we agreed that we +should like to go out with the old Indian factor, Quamodo, and hunt +jaguars under his guidance, with as many of his people as he could +collect. By the time luncheon was over, therefore, he had provided a +party of Indians, armed with long lances, and a number of sturdy-looking +dogs very unlike our own high-bred animals--which, being unfit for the +purpose, were left behind under the charge of their keepers. + +We proceeded some distance through the forest, the dogs advancing in +regular order like riflemen skirmishing, so that there was no chance of +a jaguar being passed without their discovering him. After keeping on +for about a couple of miles, the dogs stopped and began to bay loudly; +whereupon the old Indian told us to halt, with our arms ready for +action, while the lance-men moved forward. The dogs, encouraged by +their masters' voices, continued to advance; and we soon caught sight of +a jaguar thirty yards in front of us, seated on his haunches, prepared +for fight. Several of the more daring dogs now sprang forward, but two +paid dearly for their boldness; for the jaguar striking them with his +huge paw, they soon lay dead at his feet. The Indians now allowed the +dogs to attack the jaguar. Taught wisdom by the fate of their +companions, however, they assaulted him in the rear, rushing in on his +haunches, biting him, and then retiring. This continued for some time. +Although the jaguar saw the men, he had first to settle with his canine +enemies; and the efforts he made to keep them at a distance apparently +considerably exhausted him. The Indians then shouted and threw sticks +towards him, in order to irritate him and make him spring upon them; and +having got up to within twenty yards of him, they next presented their +lances in such a position that, when he might spring, they would receive +him on the points. Suddenly he began to move; then he sprang, moving in +a semicircular line, like a cat and uttering a tremendous roar. The +lance-men kept their bodies bent, grasping their lances with both hands, +while one end rested on the ground. I thought that the jaguar would +have killed the man at whom he sprung, but the Indian was strong of +nerve as well as of limb, and the point of his lance entered the +jaguar's chest, when the others immediately rushed forward and +despatched the savage brute with their weapons. + +Old Quamodo told us how it sometimes happens that a hunter unfortunately +fails to receive the jaguar on his lance; and in many instances he is +torn to pieces before he can be assisted. His only resource on such an +occasion is his manchette, or long knife,--by means of which, if he can +stab the jaguar, he may possibly escape. Quamodo also narrated how, +upon one occasion in his youth, when he was very fond of jaguar hunting, +he only slightly wounded an animal with his lance, and the jaguar, +closing with him, knocked him down with his paw. Keeping his presence +of mind, however, he drew his long knife with one hand, while he seized +the throat of the jaguar with the other. A desperate struggle ensued, +and he received several severe wounds from the claws and teeth of the +creature. As he rolled over and over he made good use of his knife, +stabbing his antagonist until the jaguar sank down dead from loss of +blood. He managed to crawl home, and recovered. He declared that as +soon as he was well again he went out hunting, and killed a couple of +jaguars, in revenge for the injuries he had received. + +On another occasion, while out hunting, he fell asleep on a bank, +exhausted by fatigue. Suddenly he was awakened by a tremendous blow on +the side of the head. His natural impulse was to start up and shout +lustily, when he saw a huge jaguar standing close to him, about to +repeat the salute. His cries were heard by his companions, who were at +a short distance, and they hastened to his assistance. The jaguar, +however, was probably not very hungry, for before he could use his +manchette, or his friends come up, the creature bounded off, leaving the +hunter with the top of his ear torn away, and an ugly scratch on his +head. Still the old Indian was of opinion that the jaguar seldom +attacks human beings unless first molested by them. + +We encountered and killed another animal, much in the same way as the +first; and having secured their skins, we returned to the farm, and +afterwards set off on our way home. As we emerged from the forest we +saw that clouds of inky blackness were collecting rapidly overhead, and +spreading across the whole valley. + +"We must push forward, for we are about to have a storm, and no slight +one," observed Uncle Richard. "Fast as we may go, however, we shall not +escape the whole of it." + +Scarcely had he spoken when a flash of the most vivid lightning darted +from the sky, wriggling along the ground like a huge snake. + +"It's well that we are in the open country; but even here we may be +overtaken by one of those flashes--though Heaven grant that they may +pass us by," said Uncle Richard. + +The flashes were succeeded by the most tremendous roars of thunder, as +if the whole artillery of heaven were being discharged at once. The +animals we rode stopped and trembled, and when urged by the spur dashed +forward as if running a race for their lives; indeed, it was no easy +matter to sit them, as they sprang now on one side, now on the other. +In a short time the rain came down in torrents, every drop, as the +dominie declared, "as big as a hen's egg." As a natural consequence, in +a few seconds we were wet to the skin, though that mattered but little. + +While we were passing a lofty and magnificent tree, about fifty yards +off, a flash darted from the sky, and a fearful crash was heard. The +next instant the tree was gone, shivered to the very roots, while the +fragments of its branches and trunk strewed the ground around. No +shelter was at hand; indeed, unless to escape the rain, it would have +been useless, for the strongest building would not have secured us from +the effects of such a flash. Our great object was to keep away from any +trees which might attract the lightning. + +The storm was still raging when we arrived at home, where we found Dona +Maria and Rosa in no small alarm about us,--thinking more of our safety +than their own. They had closed all the windows and doors--as they +said, to keep the lightning out; although in reality it only prevented +them from seeing the bright flashes. The trembling mules were sent +round to the stables; while Uncle Richard produced various articles from +his wardrobe with which to clothe us. + +The ladies laughed heartily as we made our appearance at the +supper-table. Hugh was dressed with one of Rosa's petticoats over his +shoulders, which she declared gave him a very Oriental look. The +dominie had on a flowered dressing-gown of Uncle Richard's, with a pair +of loose drawers, and a sash round his waist. Juan wore a red shirt, a +sky-blue dress coat, and a pair of shooting breeches; while I was rigged +out in an entire suit belonging to our host, a world too wide, and much +too short. + +The storm had by this time ceased, though the thunder, as it rolled away +down the valley, was occasionally heard. + +The ladies were amused by the account of our adventures, especially on +hearing of the alarm of Mr Laffan at the unexpected appearance of the +tiger-cat Uncle Richard having proposed music, Dona Maria and Rosa got +their guitars and sang very sweetly. + +"Now let us have a dance," cried our host, jumping up; "old Pepe plays +the fiddle, and we have another fellow who is an adept with the pipes." + +The persons named were sent for. The first was a grey-headed old man, +half Spaniard, half Indian; the latter a young man, a pure-blooded +Indian. The merry strains they struck up inspired us all; even the +dominie rose and began to snap his fingers and kick his heels. Don +Ricardo setting the example, we were soon all engaged in an uproarious +country dance; while every now and then we burst into laughter, as we +looked at each other, and criticised our costumes. + +Pretty well tired out, we soon turned into our hammocks, Uncle Richard +having proposed another excursion on the following day. + +On getting up in the morning, we found all the females of the family +already on foot, busily engaged in various household duties. Dona +Maria, habited in a somewhat _degage_ costume, was superintending the +baking of Indian corn bread, which was done in the most primitive +fashion. Some of the girls were pounding the grain in huge mortars with +pestles, which it required a strong pair of arms to use; others were +kneading large masses of the flour in pans, which were then formed into +flat cakes, and placed on a copper "girdle" with a charcoal fire +beneath, where they were quickly baked. They gave us some of the cakes +to stay our appetites, just hot from the "girdle," and most delicious +they were. + +Having taken a turn round the fields, where the labourers were +assembling to commence work, we returned to an early breakfast. As Mr +Laffan had seen but little of the country, Uncle Richard proposed that +we should visit some interesting places in the neighbourhood. Juan +excused himself; he very naturally wished to pay his respects to Dona +Dolores, and soon afterwards rode off. + +"He is desperately in love, there's no doubt about that," remarked Dona +Maria. "Dolores will make much of him, for she is equally attached to +him, though she will not acknowledge it. She is a fine spirited girl--a +devoted Patriot. She converted her father, who was rather disposed to +side with the Godos for the sake of a quiet life; but she roused him up, +and he is now as warm in the cause of liberty as she is." + +"Are you not a Patriot, Aunt Maria?" I asked. + +"I side with my husband, and he is an Englishman." + +"But Englishmen love liberty and hate tyranny, if they are worthy of the +name of Britons," I answered; "and I hope we shall all be ready, when +the time comes, to fight for freedom." + +"But we may lose our property and our lives, if the Spaniards prevail," +she remarked. + +"They must not prevail; we must conquer!" exclaimed Uncle Richard, who +just then came in. + +"Has Dona Dolores won you over?" asked Dona Maria of her husband. + +"She is a noble creature, and sees things in their true light," answered +Uncle Richard. "While the Spaniards have the upper hand, through +keeping the people in subjection by their soldiers, and their minds in +darkness and superstition through the teaching of the priests, our +country can never flourish. All progress is stopped. Our agriculture +is stunted, our commerce crippled, and no manufactures can exist." + +"That's just what Dona Dolores says," observed Aunt Maria. + +"And she says the truth," answered Uncle Richard. "I for one am +resolved to aid the Patriot cause; and you, my dear wife, will +acknowledge that I am acting rightly. You cannot wish to see our +children slaves; and what else can they be, if, for fear of the +consequences, we tamely submit to the yoke of Spain?" + +I remembered this conversation in after-days, when Uncle Richard showed +how fully he kept up to the principles he professed, and Dona Maria +proved herself to be a true and faithful wife. + +After Uncle Richard had transacted some business, we set off on our +expedition, mounted on mules, for the road we had to traverse was rough +and uneven in the extreme. We had several small rivers to cross, which, +in consequence of the storm of the preceding day, had become torrents, +and almost carried our mules off their legs. The beds of the streams, +too, were full of large stones, which had fallen down from the +mountains. In these torrents swimming is of no avail, as the water +rushes on with irresistible force, carrying everything before it. +Sometimes in the descent of the hills the mules sat on their haunches, +gliding down with their fore-feet stretched out in the most scientific +fashion. + +At length, sliding down a steep descent, we arrived at the hot spring, +which issues from an aperture about three feet in diameter, at the +bottom of the valley--the water bubbling up very much like that in a +boiling pot. Around the brink of the aperture is an incrustation of +brimstone, of a light colour, from which we broke off several pieces and +carried them away. The dominie put in his finger to test the heat of +the water, but drew it out again pretty quickly. + +"You will not find me doing that a second time!" he exclaimed, as he put +his scalded finger into his mouth to cool it. + +We had brought some eggs, which were boiled hard in little more than +three minutes. + +Mr Laffan having carried away some of the water, afterwards analysed +it, and found it to be composed of sulphur and salt. On being exposed +to the sun, the sulphur evaporated, and left pure white salt fit for +use. + +After leaving the spring, we continued some way further towards the Rio +Vinaigre, or Vinegar River. On our road we passed several Indian huts +perched on the summits of precipices which appeared perfectly +inaccessible; but, of course, there were narrow paths by which the +inhabitants could climb up to their abodes. They naturally delight in +these gloomy and solitary situations, and had sufficient reasons for +selecting them: for they were here free from the attacks of wild beasts +or serpents, and also from their cruel masters the Spaniards, who were +accustomed to drag them away to work in the mines, to build +fortifications, or to serve in the ranks of their armies. + +Dismounting, we climbed up a zig-zag path, to pay a visit to one of +these Indian abodes which was less difficult to reach than the rest, +although a couple of well-armed men, supplied with a store of rocks, +could from the summit have kept a whole army at bay. The hut was the +abode of an old Indian, the descendant of the chief of a once powerful +tribe. We found him leaning against the sunny side of his house, and +holding on to a long staff with which he supported himself. He was +dressed in a large broad-brimmed hat, a poncho over his shoulders, and +sandals on his feet. His projecting, dropping lower jaw exhibited the +few decayed teeth he had in his head, which, with his lustreless eyes, +made him look the very picture of decrepitude. He brightened up and +rose, however, as he saw Uncle Richard,--with whom he was acquainted, +and who had frequently shown him kindness,--and welcomed us to his +abode. + +The thatched hut was diminutive, and full of smoke, as there was but one +small hole in the roof by which it could escape. Some distance behind +it, and separated by a wide chasm, over which a bamboo bridge had been +thrown, was a wide level space, with mountains rising above it, on which +sheep and goats were feeding--the fields fenced round by a shrub called +el lechero, or milk-tree, which derives its name from a white liquid +oozing out of it when a branch is broken off. This liquid, however, is +sharp and caustic. The sticks, about six feet in height, throw out +young shoots like the osier, and when pruned become very thick, and form +an excellent fence. Within the enclosure were growing patches of wheat, +potatoes, and Indian corn, as also the yuca root, from the flour of +which palatable cakes are formed. This mountain plantation was +cultivated, the old man told us, by the faithful followers of his tribe. +He had no children; he was the last of his race. + +Uncle Richard had an object in paying the visit. The old Indian had +considerable influence over the inhabitants of the surrounding hills, +and he wished to stir them up, when the time should come, to join the +Patriot ranks. + +"I am too old myself to strike a blow for liberty," said the old man; +"but often, as I gaze over yonder wide valley, and remember that once it +belonged to my ancestors, that by the cruelty and oppression of the +Godos my people are now reduced to a handful, and that the sufferings +and death of thousands of my people rest on the heads of our oppressors, +my heart swells with indignation. Si, Senor Ricardo, si. You may +depend on me that I will use all the influence I possess to arouse my +people, but I fear that we shall be able to send scarce fifty warriors +into the field--many of them mere youths, although they have the hearts +of men." + +After some further conversation, Uncle Richard left a present with the +old cacique, and we bade him farewell. + +On reaching the foot of the cliff we met several Indians, who, having +observed us from neighbouring heights, had come down to ascertain the +object of our visit. Uncle Richard spoke to them, although not so +openly as he had done to the chief. The men had a peculiarly serious +cast of countenance; not one of them smiled while with us, but they +appeared good-tempered, and were perfectly civil. Their eyes were +large, fine, and full of expression; and two or three girls who were of +the party were decidedly good-looking, which is more than can be said of +Indian maidens in general. Each man was accompanied by a dog, of which +he seemed very fond. Round their huts we saw abundance of fruit, and +several fat pigs, so that they were evidently well off for provisions. + +It is wonderful how long these Indians will go without food by chewing +coca leaf, which is far more sustaining and refreshing than tobacco. + +"Those men would make sturdy soldiers, and fight bravely," observed +Uncle Richard, as we rode away. + +Our destination was a small valley, through which the Rio Vinaigre makes +its way towards the Cauca. We left our animals at the top of the hill, +as the descent was so steep and slippery that it would have been +impossible to ride down it. As it was, we could scarcely keep our legs, +and the dominie more than once nearly fell head over heels. + +Uncle Richard, by-the-by, had not told our worthy friend the character +of the river-water. He had brought a cup, formed from a gourd, which +answered the purpose of a "quaich," as it is called in Scotland; and we +made our way down to the edge of the stream, where he could dip out a +cupful. The water appeared bright and sparkling, and the dominie, who +was thirsty after his walk, put it to his lips and took a huge gulp. +Directly afterwards he spat it out, with a ridiculous grimace, +exclaiming-- + +"Rotten lemons, iron filings, and saltpetre, by all that is abominable! +Ah, faith! there must have been poison in the cup." + +"Wash it out and try again," said Uncle Richard; "although, I tell you, +I believe the cup is perfectly clean." + +The dominie made a second attempt, with the same result. + +"You find it taste somewhat like vinegar?" asked Uncle Richard. + +"Indeed I do," answered Mr Laffan. "Is it always like this?" + +"Yes," said Uncle Richard; "it comes in its present state out of the +mountain, and you were not far from the truth in your description, as +when analysed it is found to be acidulated, nitrous, and ferruginous. +So completely does it retain these qualities, that in the Cauca, several +leagues below where it falls into that river, not a fish is to be found, +as the finny tribe appear to have as great a dislike to it as yourself." + +The dominie, to satisfy himself, carried away half a bottle, for the +purpose of analysing it on his return home. + +Proceeding up the valley, we visited, in succession, three waterfalls, +one of which came down over a perpendicular cliff, with a descent of a +couple of hundred feet. We then bent our steps homewards, stopping by +the way to dine and rest our animals at a farm belonging to Uncle +Richard, and which it was one of the objects of our excursion to visit. +The building was entirely of wood, with wide projecting eaves, supported +by posts united by a railing, which gave it a very picturesque +appearance. Around the house was an enclosure for the poultry, of which +there was a great profusion. Indeed, it would have been difficult for a +hen-wife to know her hens. Outside this was another enclosure for +cattle and horses. In a smaller paddock were several llamas, which are +not indigenous to this part of the country. They had been brought from +Upper Peru, where they are used as beasts of burden, and were here +occasionally so employed. It was a pretty rural scene. + +"It's lovely, it's lovely! In truth, it reminds me of Old Ireland, +barring the palm-trees, and the cacti, and the chirramoyas, and the +Indian corn, and those llama beasts," exclaimed Mr Laffan. Then +looking at the Indian women who were tending the poultry, he added, "And +those olive damsels. Ah, young gentlemen, you should see my own fair +countrywomen, and you would acknowledge that through the world you +couldn't meet any beings so lovely under the blue vault of heaven-- +whatever there may be above it in the form of angels; and they are as +modest as they are good." + +Mr Laffan continued to expatiate on the perfections of green Erin's +Isle, its mountains, lakes, and rivers, a theme in which he delighted, +until his eyes glistened, and his voice choked with emotion, as he +thought of the country he might never again see. + +Uncle Richard having inspected the farm, and examined some of the +horses, we mounted our animals and proceeded homewards. We were +approaching the house, when we caught sight of Paul Lobo galloping +towards us from the direction of Popayan. + +"What is the matter?" exclaimed Uncle Richard, observing his excited +manner. + +"El senor doctor want to see you, Massa Duncan, in quarter less no time. +Says he, You Paul Lobo, get on horseback and bring him here." + +The horse stood panting for breath, its nostrils covered with foam, +showing at what a rate he must have ridden. + +"Why does he want to see me?" I asked anxiously. "Is he ill, or my +mother or Flora?" + +"No, no! dey all berry well; but el senor doctor got news from Cauca, +and berry bad news too. De Spaniards enter dere, and cut de t'roats ob +all de men 'cept what ride or run away, and de women as bad, and dey +come on quick march to Popayan; do de same t'ing dere, no doubt." + +"That is indeed bad news," I said. "We will get our horses and return +home to-night; they are fortunately fresh. You must change horses, +Paul, and go with us, after you have had some food." + +"We must endeavour to oppose them, if it can be done with any chance of +success," exclaimed Uncle Richard, who had just then come up. "I will +accompany you, Duncan, and ascertain what your father advises. We will +let Senor Monteverde and Dona Dolores know, in case they may not have +received the information." + +We immediately entered the house, and Uncle Richard sent off a messenger +to the Monteverdes, where he supposed Juan would be found. + +While we had dinner, and prepared for our ride, Paul took some food, and +was again ready to start when the horses were brought round. + +Dona Maria was much agitated on hearing the news. "Do nothing rash, my +dear Richard," she said to her husband. "It is impossible to withstand +the Godos." + +"Nothing is impossible to brave men fighting in a just cause," answered +Uncle Richard. + +Embracing his wife and Rosa, to whom we had already bidden farewell, he +joined us in the courtyard, where we sat our horses ready to start. We +had a long ride before us in the dark, the road being none of the best, +but our steeds were sure-footed, and we were well accustomed to them. + +We had got to some distance, when we heard the tramp of horses coming +along a road which led from the Monteverdes' house, and Dona Dolores, +with her father and four domestics, all armed, came up. She sat her +steed, as far as I could judge in the fast gathering gloom, like a +person who had thorough command over it. She rode up to me, as if +desirous of speaking; and I took the opportunity to inquire for my +friend Juan, observing that he had not returned to Don Ricardo's. + +"He has gone home to commence the career which, I trust, he will from +henceforth follow," she replied. "He will endeavour to raise and arm +the men on his property, as well as others from the surrounding +villages. We were already aware that the Spaniards were advancing up +the valley, and had been engaged in sending information in all +directions to arouse the Patriots, and to counsel them to take up arms +in defence of their homes and families. We may count on you, Senor +Duncan? Young as you are, you may render essential service to our +glorious cause, though your arm may not yet be strong enough to wield a +sword." + +"I believe I could make very good use of one, if necessary," I answered, +somewhat piqued by her remark. "Juan would tell you that I can hold my +own, even against him." + +"I am glad to hear it," she observed. + +"We must not count the cost, dear as that may be," I said; "but I shall +be ready to yield up my life, and everything I possess, could I be sure +that victory would be gained by the sacrifice." + +"We may count on you, then, as a Patriot?" + +"Yes, most certainly, as you can on Don Ricardo." + +"And upon your tall tutor? I don't know his name." + +I told her his name, and she immediately rode up alongside Mr Laffan. +We were ascending a hill too steep to gallop up, which enabled us to +hold this conversation. What the patriotic young lady said to the +dominie I did not at the time know, but, whatever his previous +sentiments were, her enthusiastic eloquence soon won him to the cause +she had espoused. + +On reaching the level ground, we galloped forward as hard as our horses +could go, led by Uncle Richard. Our worthy tutor kept by the side of +Hugh, about whom he seemed to have no little anxiety; but my young +brother sat his horse as well as any of us, and assured Mr Laffan that +he need not be troubled about him. Dona Dolores, with her father, +followed close behind Uncle Richard, and whenever we were obliged to +pull up she spoke with her usual earnestness to one or other of the +party, as if eager to make the best use of the time in impressing her +ideas on others. She did not disdain to speak even to Paul Lobo. + +"I do what massa el senor doctor does," was the reply. + +She found, at last, that she could make nothing of Paul--who was, +however, as great a lover of liberty as any of us. + +Crossing the bridge, we at length entered the city, where the streets +were even more quiet than usual. We scarcely met a single person as we +rode up to our house. It was perhaps as well that we did not, for the +appearance of so large a party might have roused the suspicions of some +of the Spanish authorities. + +My father came in from visiting a patient at the moment we arrived. +Dona Dolores and Senor Monteverde had, I should have said, parted from +us, and gone to the house of a friend. My father seemed somewhat +surprised at seeing Uncle Richard with us, but said he was very glad +that he had come. We found supper on the table waiting us; and as soon +as the servants had withdrawn, my father addressed me, and told us the +particulars of the news he had received. + +"This city will not be a safe place for women and children, or any one +else, in a short time," he observed. "Those who have duties to perform +must remain at their posts. I have numerous patients whom I ought not +to and will not desert. I therefore sent for you, Duncan, to take +charge of your mother and sister, and to escort them to your Uncle +Richard's, where you can watch over their safety. I know that I can +rely on Mr Laffan to assist you." + +"Indeed, sir, you may," he replied; "while I have an arm to strike a +blow, I will fight for the ladies." + +"I hope that while they are in my house they will run no risk, removed +as it is from the city," said Uncle Richard; "and if you will entrust +them to my keeping, I will take care of them, along with my wife and +daughter. Duncan and Mr Laffan may be of use here." + +Uncle Richard then began to tell my father the plans which had been +formed for preventing the Spaniards from entering the city. + +My father stopped him. "I desire not to be acquainted with anything +that is going forward. It is my duty to endeavour to heal the sick and +wounded, in the character of a physician and a non-combatant. I may +remain unmolested, and be able to serve the cause of humanity. As for +Duncan and Mr Laffan, I will reconsider my intentions. I will, +however, accept your offer as regards my wife and Flora, and place them +under your care." + +It was finally arranged that my mother and sister, with their female +attendants, and Hugh, should set off the next morning, escorted by Uncle +Richard; and that Mr Laffan and I should remain until, in the course of +events, it might be decided what was best to be done. + + + +CHAPTER FOUR. + +MY MOTHER AND SISTER LEAVE POPAYAN WITH UNCLE RICHARD--MR. LAFFAN AND I +ACCOMPANY THEM--LION GIVEN TO ME--MEET JUAN AND HIS TROOP--HEAR AN +INSPIRITING ADDRESS FROM DONA DOLORES--A POLITICAL BALL AT DON CARLOS +MOSQUERA'S--DONA DOLORES WARNS ME AGAINST CAPTAIN LOPEZ--SHE ENLISTS +NUMEROUS RECRUITS--THE DOMINIE SHOWS THAT HE HAS HAD MILITARY +EXPERIENCE--DRILLING THE LEVIES--THE CITIZENS EMPLOYED IN ERECTING +FORTIFICATIONS--THE ENEMY APPROACH--PREPARATIONS FOR THE DEFENCE--THE +SUMMONS TO ARMS--THE CITY ATTACKED--MR. LAFFAN AND I JOIN DON JUAN--THE +ENEMY DRIVEN BACK--A SORTIE--THE ENEMY ATTACKED--GUNS CAPTURED--RETURN +IN TRIUMPH TO THE CITY. + +During the night information was received that the Spaniards, two days +before, had entered Bouga, on the Cauca, leaving us in no doubt that +they were advancing up the valley, and might be expected in our +neighbourhood in the course of three or four days--perhaps even their +cavalry might appear sooner, as they probably, thinking there was no +force to oppose them, would push on ahead of the main body. My father +therefore kept to his resolution of sending off my mother and sister; +and the next morning at daylight, after a hurried breakfast, the horses +and mules were brought round to the courtyard, ready to start. My +mother and sister, and the female attendants, rode the mules; the rest +of the party were mounted on horseback. It was settled that Mr Laffan +and I should accompany them to Egido, as we could without difficulty be +back before nightfall. + +Our uncle, Dr Cazalla, came to see our mother off. + +"I wish that you would accompany us, my dear brother," she said. "If +the Spaniards take the place, you are certain to be annoyed and +persecuted, even should no worse consequences follow." + +"No, no; I must stay at my post, as your husband intends doing. We must +set a good example. If the principal people run away, what may be +expected of others?" + +My mother's entreaties were of no avail, so Uncle Richard, finding that +all was ready, gave the word to move on. + +We proceeded as fast as the mules could travel, and by noon arrived at +Uncle Richard's hacienda, where Aunt Maria and Rosa gave my mother a +warm reception. + +"We shall here, I trust, be safe from the Spaniards; but if we hear of +their coming, we must take to the mountains, where even they will be +unable to find us," said Dona Maria. + +"But what will become of the house and estate?" asked my mother. + +"We must leave that matter in God's hands," answered Dona Maria. "If +the fruit trees are cut down, and the corn destroyed, he can restore +them. The Godos cannot prevent that." + +As soon as our horses had baited, the dominie and I prepared to start on +our return. I embraced my mother and sister affectionately, and bade +farewell to dear little Rosa and Aunt Maria. We knew not what might +occur before we should meet again. I had, while staying at the house, +admired a fine dog called Lion, which had grown from a puppy into a +noble animal since I first saw him. The creature had taken a great +fancy to me, too, and this had been observed by Uncle Richard. + +"I make you a present of him, Duncan," said Uncle Richard; "he will +prove faithful, I am sure, and may possibly be of service." + +Lion was a species of hound, with a thick tawny coat and large paws, +possessing prodigious strength. He was good-tempered and obedient, but +at the same time it was very evident that he could fight desperately +with those powerful jaws of his. Patting his head, I told him that he +was to accompany us, and he seemed fully to understand me. The dominie +was already mounted. Lion looked at Uncle Richard when he saw me +getting on horseback, as if to ask if he was to go. Uncle Richard +nodded, and pointed to me. So Lion set off, keeping close to my heels +all the way, clearly understanding that I was in future to be his +master. + +Mr Laffan was as eager to get back to the town as I was, in order to +hear the news. We were still about half a league from Popayan, when we +saw, in an open space near a wood, a considerable body of men, some on +horseback, others on foot, with flags fluttering above their heads. As +we approached, one of them rode out to meet us, in whom I recognised Don +Juan, though much changed in appearance. Instead of his civil garb he +was dressed in military fashion, with a long lance in his hand, a +carbine at his back, and pistols in his holsters. + +"I have not been idle, you see, Duncan," he observed, after we had +greeted each other. "I have raised fifty fine fellows, and hope to have +a hundred more mounted and armed in a day or two. If every gentleman +will do the same, we shall soon collect a Patriot force sufficient to +drive back the Spaniards." + +We rode forward with him to see his troop. The larger number were +mounted, but there were some infantry armed with long guns--tall, sinewy +fellows, dressed in broad-brimmed hats, loose trousers, and coats +fastened by pouch belts round their waists. The horsemen also wore +large sombreros, leggings and huge spurs, and tight-fitting jackets; and +they were armed with spears and swords of various lengths. Some had +pistols, others carbines, but the lance was the principal weapon. + +We rode together into the town,--the infantry, who wore only sandals on +their feet, keeping up with the horses. We were passing down one of the +streets on our way to a convent which the authorities had turned into +barracks, when a lady appeared at a balcony. Juan reined in his steed, +and ordered his men to halt. I recognised Dona Dolores. My friend +bowed low, with a look of pride on his countenance. Dona Dolores +smiled, and addressed a few encouraging words to the men, reminding them +of the cruelties which had often been inflicted by the hated Godos, +urging them to fight bravely, and not to sheathe their swords until they +had driven their foes into the sea. The men cheered, and Dona Dolores +saying she would no longer delay them, we rode on. + +The dominie and I parted from Juan at the next turning, and soon reached +home. Finding that my father was just setting out to attend a large +party given at the house of Don Carlos Mosquera, one of the principal +inhabitants of the place, Mr Laffan and I hurriedly dressed and +accompanied him. Though ostensibly a ball, the real object was to bring +persons of Liberal principles together, of both sexes. As many of the +upper classes took a warm interest in the cause of freedom, nearly all +the ladies of the influential families were there, with their husbands +and fathers. I was surprised, also, to see several parish priests, who +were as warm in the cause as any other person. Indeed, one of these +padres had donned a semi-military costume, and announced his intention +of aiding his countrymen with his sword. Those who knew him best said +that he could fight as well as he could preach. + +I soon met Dona Dolores and her father. She smiled, and beckoned me to +her. + +"I was glad to see you just now with Don Juan, and I hope that you will +obtain your father's leave to join his corps," she said. + +I replied that I would gladly do so, but that at present my father +wished me to remain with him at Popayan. + +While we were speaking Don Juan joined us, when Dona Dolores +complimented him on his zeal and activity in so soon getting together a +body of men. + +"We have got the men, the arms, and the horses, but we all require what +cannot so readily be obtained--the necessary discipline," he answered. +"I myself require to learn the duties of an officer, for, except that I +can use a sword and lance, I know little of military affairs." + +"You will soon learn, Juan," said Dona Dolores in encouraging tones; +"you must obtain an expert instructor, and your own natural talents will +point out to you how to act on most occasions." + +Just then a military officer approached and bowed to Dona Dolores. I +saw an expression of scorn pass over her countenance, unobserved by +Juan, who, saluting the officer, addressed him as Captain Lopez. + +"The very man I want," observed my friend. "I have just raised a body +of men, who require to be disciplined. You have had experience; you +must join me, if you do not already belong to a regiment." + +I did not hear the answer given by Captain Lopez, but Dona Dolores, +turning to me, said, "He is not to be trusted; a mean-spirited fellow, +though a great boaster. You must tell Juan not to accept his services." + +This Captain Lopez was, I afterwards found, a rejected suitor for the +hand of Dona Dolores. With her clear perception, she had discovered +that he did not possess the qualities she could admire. + +Juan and Captain Lopez had gone to some distance, and were engaged in +eager conversation. During this time several persons had come up and +asked Dona Dolores to dance; but she declined, saying that she was in no +mood for such an amusement. She contrived, however, to keep most of +them by her side for some time, while she urged on them the duty of +joining the Patriot cause. I left her surrounded by a number of +gentlemen, and went to look after Juan, to whom I wished to repeat the +remarks I had heard from Dona Dolores. I found him at length in an +alcove, still talking with Captain Lopez. The captain's countenance, as +I watched him at a little distance, impressed me very unfavourably. +There was a scowl on his brow, and a peculiar wrinkle about his lips, +which made me feel that I for one would not trust him; and I hoped that +my friend would not be induced to do so either. + +I waited until the captain quitted Juan, to whom I then went up, and +told him what Dona Dolores had said. + +"She is too probably right, for she has wonderful perception of +character; but, unfortunately, I have engaged Captain Lopez to come and +drill my men, and I cannot now well put him off without his considering +himself insulted. However, I will remember the warning I have received, +and not trust him too much. I intend to bear the whole expense of the +corps myself, and am anxious to get some smart young officers. I wish +that you would join us, Duncan. You would soon learn your duties; they +come almost by instinct to some people." + +"If I can get my father's leave, depend upon it I will," I answered; +"and as Mr Laffan has seen some service, I have no doubt that he will +assist you. Perhaps he himself will join. I suspect that he would be +as well able to drill your corps as Captain Lopez." + +Several gentlemen present had been engaged in raising men; and, I was +told, there were already upwards of two thousand troops in town, though +few of them were sufficiently disciplined to meet the enemy. Other +Patriot leaders were scouring the country round to obtain recruits, and +these, in small parties, were coming in during the night. + +In spite of the serious aspect of affairs, the people at this ball +danced as much as ever. The card-tables were also filled, but the +players stopped very frequently, forgetting the game to discuss matters +of importance. I understood that there were men on the watch at the +doors, to give notice should any foes to the Liberal party make their +appearance. + +"I found, on our return home, that my father was pretty well satisfied +with the enthusiasm exhibited by the people generally. + +"Bloodshed I fear there must be, for the Spaniards fancy that they can +overthrow liberty with a few blows, and are determined to stamp it out; +but they are mistaken," he observed. + +From dawn the next morning, till nightfall, the new levies were +undergoing drill in the great square. I saw Juan at the head of his +men, and Captain Lopez drilling them. + +"Don't you think you can give my friend Juan a helping hand?" I said to +Mr Laffan, who had accompanied me. + +"Faith, it's not impossible!" he exclaimed, his eye brightening. "If he +asks me, I'll try to brush up my knowledge of such matters." + +I told Juan what the dominie had said, when he at once came forward and +begged that he would take charge of a part of his men. + +"Is it the cavalry or the infantry?" asked Mr Laffan. + +"The cavalry are the most important," answered Juan. "Here is a spare +horse at your service." + +Mr Laffan at once leapt into the saddle, and going to the head of the +men, formed them into line. To my surprise, he gave the proper orders +in Spanish without hesitation, and soon showed that he had had no little +experience as a cavalry officer. He kept the men at work for three +hours without cessation, after which they were dismissed for breakfast. +Captain Lopez cast a scowl at us as he passed on his way to his +quarters, without deigning to compliment Mr Laffan on his proficiency. +Juan accompanied us home to breakfast, and afterwards we returned to the +square, when, to my surprise, the dominie took the infantry in hand, and +drilled them for four hours in a still more thorough way even than he +had done the cavalry. + +"If we had but a few British sergeants and corporals, we should make +something of these fellows in a few weeks," he observed. "I would be +mightily obliged to the enemy if they would but wait till then; we +should by that time be able to give a good account of them." + +Don Juan, as might have been expected, begged Mr Laffan to join his +corps, offering him the command of either of the companies. + +"I am engaged to the doctor, and cannot quit his service unless he +dismisses me," he answered; "but, while I have the opportunity, I will +gladly drill your men for as many hours as they can stand on their legs. +Some years have passed since I have done any soldiering, and it makes +me feel young again to be so engaged." + +While the levies were drilling, the townspeople--including old men, +women, and children--were employed, under the few officers who had any +knowledge of engineering, in throwing up batteries and forming +entrenchments round the town. In some cases the walls were strengthened +by the aid of a machine, consisting of a large square bottomless box, +into which the mud was thrown, and then beaten down hard. A number of +these boxes were used at a time, and it was extraordinary with what +rapidity a strong wall could thus be erected. The mud was brought in +carts, in baskets, and in various other ways, and thrown into the box. +Additional strength was gained by forming a slope on the outer side. A +number of guns buried on a former occasion by the Patriots, to conceal +them from the Spaniards, were also dug up, and mounted. Night and day +the people worked, for every hour gained added to the strength of the +place, and increased the prospect of successfully resisting the enemy. + +There were several known Royalists in Popayan, who had hitherto remained +quiet; and many of them, on seeing the preparations made for the +defence, hurriedly left the town. Many Liberals also sent off their +families, to avoid the risk to which they would be exposed. Among the +Royalists I met the Bishop of Popayan, Don Salvador Ximenes, mounted on +a splendid horse, and attended by his secretary and several +ecclesiastics--who, but for their hats, I should have taken for military +officers, for they were all armed to the teeth, and had a decidedly +martial aspect. My father knew the bishop well, while I had often seen +him. Though a somewhat small man, he was remarkably well-made, and had +a good-natured, open countenance, with sparkling grey eyes. His +secretary was a tall, good-looking fellow, with a broad pair of +shoulders, but bearded like a pard, and looking little like a priest; +indeed, he had formerly been a captain of dragoons in Spain, until he +followed the bishop out to South America. Don Salvador had been canon +of the cathedral at Malaga when Buonaparte invaded Spain. On that +occasion, throwing off his ecclesiastical garb, he had assumed the rank +of a colonel, and by his preachings and exhortations he had aroused the +Spanish peasantry to resist the French. On the restoration of Ferdinand +the Seventh to the crown of Spain, the _ci-devant_ colonel was created +Bishop of Popayan, then in possession of the Spaniards, where he had +made himself very popular among all ranks, notwithstanding his political +opinions. + +On meeting the martial-looking bishop and his companions, I felt sure +that his departure foreboded no good to the Patriot cause. I bowed to +him as I passed, and he gave me a nod of recognition, although he was +well aware that I was not a member of his flock. + +I at once rode on to Don Carlos Mosquera's house, to inform him of the +departure of the bishop, should he not be acquainted with it. + +"Let him go," he answered. "He will do more harm to liberty inside the +town than he will do without; and we cannot imprison him. If he comes +as an enemy, a bullet may put a stop to his intrigues." + +I frequently met Dona Dolores on the parade-ground, riding a handsome +horse, and attended by her father, Juan, and others. She on several +occasions addressed the men, especially the new recruits, and urged them +to be faithful to the noble cause in which they were engaged. She also +occupied herself in writing to Patriots in various parts of the country, +or to persons whom she hoped to win over. + +While the citizens were working away in the town, scouts were sent out, +that we might have early notice of the approach of the enemy. Several +days elapsed, however, without any news of their approach, and this +afforded time for fortifying the city and increasing the number of its +defenders. So confident did the Patriots at length become, that it was +proposed to march out and encounter the enemy in the open country; but +wiser counsels prevailed. Our men were ill-disciplined, and we had no +field-artillery. + +Upwards of a week had passed, when the scouts brought in the information +that the Spaniards were advancing. Still two or three days must elapse +before they could reach Popayan. The interval was spent in +strengthening the fortifications, and otherwise preparing for the +defence of the city. Provisions were brought in, and gunpowder and shot +manufactured, while the drilling of the men went on as energetically as +at first. White men, Indians, and blacks, all seemed to take a real +pleasure in their duties. The army was certainly a motley one, both in +costume and colour, composed as it was of men of every shade from white +to black--the dark, however, predominating; several of the officers were +black, and others had Indian blood in their veins, if they were not pure +Indians. Where all fight for liberty, however, the only qualifications +required for command are talent and courage. Not a few even of the +highest rank could neither read nor write. + +My father, I may here say, had half consented that I should join Don +Juan's troop, and had given leave to Mr Laffan to act as he felt +inclined. + +The enemy had now got within three leagues of the city. Some deserters +who came in--or rather, I should say, some Liberals who had made their +escape from the Royalist ranks--informed us that they were not at all +prepared for the resistance they would meet with, as they were not aware +that the city was so strongly fortified and garrisoned. + +Each night we went to bed expecting that the next day might be that of +battle; but I was one morning awakened by hearing all the bells in the +city ringing. I jumped up, and going to Mr Laffan's room, found him +dressed, and in the act of buckling on his sword--afterwards sticking a +brace of pistols in his belt. + +"I intend to join Don Juan," he said; "if I fall, Duncan, you will not +forget the instruction I have given you. Good-bye, my boy; do you stay +quietly at home." + +"Not if I can help it," I answered. "Wait but five minutes. My father +will not refuse me permission to assist in defending the walls." + +I was quickly ready, and came downstairs to find my father. + +"You cannot let me play a girl's part and stay at home!" I exclaimed. +"Do let me go." + +"I am afraid I should not be right in hindering you. May Heaven protect +you!" answered my father. + +"Thank you, thank you," I replied, as if the greatest possible favour +had been granted me; and I set off with Mr Laffan. + +Mounting our horses, we rode to the lines, near which we found Juan's +troops. + +"I hope we shall have an opportunity of making a sortie," exclaimed the +dominie; "we will put the Spaniards to the right-about if we get the +chance of taking them in flank." + +While our servants held the horses, we went into the nearest battery, +from whence we could see the Spaniards advancing to the attack. By the +way in which they came on, it was clear that they expected to enter an +unwalled town; and our batteries were so concealed that the enemy did +not discover their existence until close up to them, when we opened upon +them with every gun at once. Their artillery replied, but their shot +struck our embankments; while ours flew into the midst of their ranks, +creating confusion and dismay. Their infantry, however, advanced, +firing rapidly, and several of the defenders were hit; but this only +increased the ardour of the rest. The whole south side of the city was +a blaze of fire, both parties rapidly exchanging shots. The enemy, +however, soon saw that this general style of assault would not succeed, +and concentrated their efforts on the batteries defending the chief +entrance; but again and again were they driven back. + +I had gone with Mr Laffan towards the eastern side, when, by means of +our glasses, we saw a large body of men, accompanied by artillery and +cavalry, making their way round, intending apparently to attack the city +on the other side. On my conveying the information to our general, Don +Juan offered to lead out his men, and proceed by some by-paths through a +wood, so as to fall suddenly on the flank of the force--hoping to +capture the guns and put the enemy to flight. This offer was accepted. + +"You will accompany me?" said Juan to the dominie and me. + +"With all the pleasure in the world," was the answer; and in another +moment we were riding out to the southward of the city--the part Juan +had selected for the ambush. We were followed by a body of infantry, +who were to support us, for without them we could not secure the fruits +of our hoped-for victory. + +The dominie was in the highest spirits, and could scarcely restrain +himself from shouting out in his glee. Every now and then he gave a +flourish with his sword, as if well acquainted with its use. + +On we dashed, over all impediments--our light-footed infantry not far +behind. We had just time to reach the wood where we were to remain +concealed, and to give our horses breathing time, when we heard the +approach of the Spaniards. We waited in perfect silence until their +cavalry had passed, when, Juan giving the signal, we dashed out from our +cover, taking them completely by surprise. The gunners were cut down, +almost before they had time to draw their swords; after which we +immediately charged upon the infantry, who, though they received us with +an ill-directed fire, were at once thrown into confusion. Meantime the +enemy's cavalry had wheeled about as fast as the narrowness of the road +would permit them, and came charging down upon us to attempt to +recapture the guns; but our infantry, who had now come up, poured in a +hot fire, by which a third of their saddles was emptied. Unable to +ascertain our numbers, they must have imagined that they were being +attacked by a large force, and a panic seizing them, the survivors +galloped off to the south, leaving their guns in our hands, while the +infantry, whom we pursued, fled in disorder towards the main body. We +followed, sabring all we overtook; when Mr Laffan advised Juan to +return, lest an attempt might be made to retake the guns, the most +important fruit of our victory. Our foot-soldiers, however, had in the +meantime harnessed to them some of the slain troopers' horses, and when +we got back we found they were already half-way to the city. In half an +hour we were triumphantly entering it; and dragging the guns up to the +batteries, we made use of them against their late owners. + +In less than an hour after this the Spaniards were in full retreat. +Patriotic shouts rose on all sides, and the bells rang forth joyous +peals, while every man congratulated his neighbour on the victory +gained. + +Don Juan did not fail to receive a reward for his gallantry in the +approving smiles of Dona Dolores. It was his first battle, and he had +given proof that he was a brave and intelligent leader. Congratulations +were offered him on every side, and all predicted that he would ere long +become one of the chiefs of the Republic. + + + +CHAPTER FIVE. + +AROUSED BY ALARM-BELLS--COUNTRY-HOUSES SEEN ON FIRE--ANXIETY ABOUT UNCLE +RICHARD'S--RETREAT OF THE SPANIARDS--MR. LAFFAN AND I RIDE OUT TO +EGIDO--FIND THE MONTEVERDES' HOUSE BURNED TO THE GROUND--EGIDO +DESTROYED--WHAT HAS BECOME OF THE INMATES?--PROCEED IN SEARCH OF THEM-- +NO TIDINGS--INQUIRE OF SOME PEASANTRY--OBTAIN RECRUITS--PURSUED BY +SPANISH CAVALRY--ALMOST OVERTAKEN--WE REACH THE TOWN--JUAN CHASES THE +SPANIARDS--FRESH TROOPS ARRIVE--ANXIETY ABOUT OUR FAMILY AND UNCLE +RICHARD'S--PAUL LOBO SETS OUT TO FIND THEM--WE HEAR THAT THE FASTUCIANS, +HEADED BY THE BISHOP OF POPAYAN, ARE ADVANCING TO ATTACK US--OUR ARMY +MARCHES TO MEET THEM--THE BISHOP SENDS A FLAG OF TRUCE PROPOSING TERMS-- +I AND OTHERS ACCEPT AN INVITATION TO DINE WITH THE PASTUCIAN OFFICERS-- +FEARFUL TREACHERY--CAPTAIN PINSON AND MY OTHER COMPANIONS KILLED--I LEAP +FROM THE WINDOW AND MOUNT MY HORSE--A RIDE FOR LIFE. + +Rejoicings for the victory we had gained were taking place when I +returned home, wearied by the fatigues I had gone through. My father +was out attending to the wounded, of whom there were large numbers, +besides which many of the defenders had been killed. It was still dark +when I was aroused by the ringing of the alarm-bells, and dressing +hurriedly, I ran to Mr Laffan's room. He also had got up; and taking +our horses from the stable, we rode out to ascertain the cause. We +found people in every direction hastening to the ramparts. On reaching +the top of an embankment, we saw fires blazing up in several directions +to the north and east. + +"These must be country-houses and farms which the Spaniards have set on +fire," observed my companion. + +Several persons whom we found on the spot were of the same opinion. +Probably the cavalry who had escaped to the southward had returned, and, +in revenge, had set fire to all the residences they passed; or +detachments had been sent from the main body to lay waste the country. +As the more distant fires were in the direction of Egido, and Senor +Monteverde's hacienda, I felt very anxious about our family. + +Had they had time to escape? I knew too well that the Spaniards spared +neither sex nor age. My hope, however, was that Uncle Richard would +have been on the watch, and have left the house in time--though that, +too probably, had fallen a sacrifice to the vengeance of the Spaniards. + +In a short time I encountered Juan, who was anxious to march out and +attack the enemy; but the general, he said, had prohibited him from +doing so, "as his men were as yet too ill-disciplined for such an +undertaking, and would most certainly be defeated." + +The alarm that another assault was about to be made proved false, as +scouts sent out reported that the enemy were still upwards of two +leagues from the city. When daylight returned no Spaniards were in +sight, nor could any signs of them be seen from the highest point in the +city. + +Just as Mr Laffan and I returned home my father came in, tired out by +the arduous labours in which he had all night been engaged. On my +telling him of the fears I entertained of what had happened at Egido, +he, after some hesitation, gave me leave to ride out and ascertain if +the inmates had escaped. + +"I will go with you, Duncan," said Mr Laffan; "two heads are of more +value than one, and so are two swords, and if we fall in with enemies we +shall have a better chance of cutting; our way through them." + +Anxiety concerning the fate of my mother and sister overcame my father's +scruples, so, mounting our horses, Mr Laffan and I rode out through the +eastern gate. Our steeds were accustomed to the road, and we put them +to their best speed. + +We had gone about two-thirds of the way, when Mr Laffan reined in his +horse, observing,--"We may be riding right into the middle of a +detachment of the Spaniards, if we go along at this rate. More haste, +less speed! A good soldier should feel his way, when an enemy is likely +to be in the neighbourhood." + +We accordingly advanced more cautiously than we had done at first, +except when we could see our way for some distance ahead. Our road ran +not far from the residence of Senor Monteverde; and in regard to it our +worst apprehensions were fulfilled. The house had been burned to the +ground, the garden and the surrounding fields destroyed. I regretted +that I should have such sad intelligence to convey to Dona Dolores. A +glance was sufficient to show us what had been done, and as we galloped +on our anxiety increased lest Egido should have shared the same fate. + +"We must be prepared for the worst," said Mr Laffan, as he pointed to a +column of smoke which ascended above the trees in the direction of +Egido. + +In a few minutes we reached the spot where the house once stood entire; +its blackened walls alone remained, the interior filled with heaps of +still smouldering embers. The enemy had indeed made short work of it. +We found that the stables had escaped, but the horses had been carried +away, and not an animal of any description remained; nor could we see +any person moving about from whom to obtain information. We searched +the out-houses, which were not harmed, and the ruins, as far as the hot +embers would allow, but we could discover no traces of bodies. + +"The inmates must have got away before the enemy arrived," I exclaimed. + +"I truly hope so," answered Mr Laffan, but he did not look very +confident. + +"If they escaped, they would take the road to the mountains," I +suggested. "Let us ride on in that direction; we may possibly meet with +some one who has seen them. I cannot bear to return to my father +without some more hopeful information than we possess." + +The dominie not objecting, we rode on. However he very frequently stood +up in his stirrups to get a look round, fearing that we might be riding +into the lion's mouth. + +We had gone some distance when we caught sight of a group of persons +collected on a slight elevation, from whence they could obtain a view +over the plain. When they first discovered us, they showed some +disposition to conceal themselves, but on observing that we were but two +persons of fair complexion their fears apparently vanished, and they +remained waiting our approach. + +I immediately inquired whether they had seen any fugitives from the +Spaniards making their way to the mountains. + +"Yes, senor; many and good cause they had to run, for the Godos put to +death all they caught. We ourselves got away just in time from our +cottage, which the cruel barbarians burned. They would have killed us +had we remained." + +I then asked if they had seen Don Ricardo--who was, I thought, probably +known to them--with a party of ladies, either on foot or horseback. + +One of two men to whom I more particularly addressed myself answered +that they had, about daybreak, seen a party who had got some way up the +mountains, but they were too far off to enable them to distinguish who +they were. More definite information they could not give us. + +They were fine tall fellows, dressed in the universal broad-brimmed hat, +ponchos over their shoulders, and loose trousers--with, of course, bare +feet; while they were smoking in the most unconcerned manner, as if they +took their misfortunes lightly. + +"Are you not disposed to punish those, who have destroyed your farm?" I +asked. + +I then told them of the corps which were being raised, and invited them +to join. Their eyes brightened when I spoke of the possibility of +driving the Spaniards for ever from the country. A woman who was with +them, and who had remained seated beside a basket of provisions, started +to her feet. + +"Yes," she exclaimed; "we shall never enjoy peace or prosperity until +that has been accomplished! Pepe! Mariano! you will fight--we will all +fight--for so good a cause." + +They agreed to come into the town after they had gone back to their farm +and endeavoured to recover any of the cattle, pigs, or poultry which had +escaped. + +"There is little chance of that; the thieves will have carried off +everything," observed the woman. + +As we could gain no further information from these persons, we resolved +to try and make our way up the mountains, in the hope of either finding +our friends, or hearing from other fugitives where they had taken +shelter; but although we fell in with a few more people, our inquiries +proved unsuccessful. + +We had ridden some distance, when the dominie, who could see well ahead, +exclaimed. "We shall either have to hide ourselves or ride for it! +Those men are, I suspect, Spanish cavalry." + +To hide ourselves, owing to the nature of the ground, was scarcely +possible, and almost before we had turned our horses' heads, the enemy, +for such undoubtedly they were, had discovered us. Our animals, too, +from the rate at which we had come, were somewhat fatigued. We had only +stopped once, to allow them to drink at a fountain. + +"We must gallop for it," said Mr Laffan, "or we shall chance to be shot +or made prisoners by the Spaniards. Keep a firm hand on your rein, and +do not spare either whip or spur. On we go." And digging spurs into +our horses' flanks, we galloped forward in the direction of the town, +with the Spaniards in full pursuit. + +There were a dozen or more of them, but they were too far off to fire +with any chance of hitting us. We had a fair start, too, but our horses +might come down, or we might encounter another party in front; still, +neither of us were inclined to yield until every hope of escape was +gone. + +"On, on!" cried the dominie, feeling for the pistols in his holsters, so +that they might be ready at any moment. "I intend to shoot one or two +fellows if they come near us,--and you must do the same, Duncan; but it +will be better to keep well ahead of them." + +But the Spaniards' horses were fresh, and, led by a well-mounted +officer, they were gaining on us. At last they got near enough to fire, +and several bullets whistled through the air; but we were still too far +ahead to run much risk of being hit. The sound had the effect of +reanimating our horses, however, and they redoubled their efforts, their +nostrils snorting, their mouths and bodies covered with foam. At length +the towers and steeples of the city appeared in sight. If we could lead +the Spaniards up to the walls, they might, we hoped, be cut off. We +shouted, therefore, in order to attract the attention of the sentinels. +Fortunately we had been observed, and so were the enemy, for as we got +in sight of the gate it opened, and out dashed a body of horse, led by +Juan. It was now the turn of our pursuers to fly, and as we looked over +our shoulders we saw them wheeling round. At length pulling rein, we +stood on one side, while Juan and his troop dashed by. I should have +liked to have accompanied him, but our steeds, having once stopped, +could only just stagger on into the city. + +In a short time Juan returned, having cut down eight or ten of the +Spaniards, when he had to gallop back on finding himself in the presence +of a vastly superior force. + +The troops in the city, flushed with their success, were eager to be led +out against the enemy; but as they were chiefly raw recruits, the +general firmly refused to comply with their wishes. The scouts brought +back word that the enemy were retiring rapidly, although in good order, +to the northward. The object of this retrograde movement we could not +at first ascertain, but concluded that it was in consequence of other +Patriot forces gathering in their rear, and they were afraid of being +cut off from the capital. + +Our numbers now daily increased. The two peasants, Pepe and Mariano, +whom we had met, arrived with twenty companions,--tall, stalwart men, +who, with others like them, made excellent infantry. Two regiments of +fairly disciplined troops also arrived, partly officered by Englishmen +and other foreigners; and it was now said that we should be able to take +the field, if necessary, to attack the Spaniards. + +My father had, in the meantime, been fearfully anxious about Uncle +Richard's and our own family, but with the information the dominie and I +brought him his mind grew more tranquil. As he had perfect confidence +in Uncle Richard's judgment and forethought, he came to the belief that +they had made their escape before the house was attacked. I wished +again to set out in search of them, either by myself or with Mr Laffan, +and to bring them back into the city. My father, however, not being so +confident as many other people that the place would not be again +attacked, said that they were safer among the mountains than they would +be did they return to the city. "Uncle Richard," he said, "would +probably make arrangements to obtain provisions from his small farm, +which, being away from the highroad, the Spaniards would probably have +passed by without destroying." He settled, however, to send Paul Lobo +with a mule loaded with warm clothing for the ladies, wine, and other +articles which they were likely to require. + +"Depend on me, massa. I find dem out, wherever dey are, and bring back +word," answered Paul, as he prepared to set out. + +I occasionally saw Dona Dolores. Juan, too, whenever disengaged from +his military duties, spent most of his time in her society, and, +imbibing the principles which animated her, became more and more +attached to the Patriot cause. + +We had generally great difficulty in obtaining intelligence of the +movements of our friends in different parts of the country, as the +Spaniards did their best to capture, and invariably shot, every +messenger or bearer of despatches. Indeed, they treated Patriots as +banditti beyond the pale of the law. It must be owned, however, that +our party often retaliated on them in a fearful manner. + +We were anxiously waiting for Paul's return, when information was +received that the Pastucians--the inhabitants of the province of Pasto, +some way to the south of Popayan, who, being completely under the +influence of the priests, had always opposed the Patriots--had risen in +arms, and were marching northward in large numbers. They had been +induced to rise by no less a person than Don Salvador Ximenes, the +Bishop of Popayan; and it was said that that illustrious prelate, armed +cap-a-pie, and accompanied by his stalwart secretary, was at the head of +the Pastucian army. At first the report was not believed, but our spies +corroborated it; so, as doubt no longer remained on the subject, it was +settled that the Patriot forces must immediately march to repel the +enemy, in order to prevent the southern part of our province being +overrun. Our troops, now pretty fairly drilled, were eager for the +expedition. We had a good body of infantry; our artillery was +represented by the three guns we had captured; and we had five hundred +cavalry, including Don Juan's troop--to which both I and Mr Laffan were +now regularly attached. + +Early in the morning we marched out of Popayan, and as we surveyed our +forces, we, from the oldest to the youngest soldier, felt confident of +victory. + +But I must rapidly pass over this time. A march of several days brought +us in sight of the enemy, who lay encamped about two leagues from where +we halted. They were posted in an advantageous position close to a +small village, with inaccessible heights behind them, a rapid stream in +front, and a defile on the south which could be held by a few men, +through which they might retreat if defeated. We occupied a less +formidable position, but one which would enable the whole of our force +to act at once, should we be attacked. Our men were in high spirits, +and as ready to attack the enemy's position as to defend their own, +should the Pastucians, taking the initiative, assault us. Instead of +doing so, however, a flag of truce was sent into our camp from the +bishop, expressing his wish to prevent bloodshed by an amicable +arrangement of matters. Our general replied that the surest way of +bringing this about was for his followers to return to their homes and +disarm. + +Several priests and others came with the flag of truce, under the +pretence of visiting their friends in our camp; and wonderfully busy +they were. It was thought that an amicable arrangement would be arrived +at, and that both parties would march back without coming to blows. So +friendly, indeed, were we, to all appearance, that the Pastucian +officers sent an invitation to the officers of the flank company of the +regiment of the Cauca to dine within their lines. An English officer, a +Captain Brown, to whom I was paying a visit, and who was unwell at the +time, begged that I would go instead of him, as I might be amused--the +Pastucians having the credit of being a set of rough diamonds. + +The next day about a dozen of us set out for the Pastucian lines, two +leagues off--Captain Pinson, the commander of the company, being our +leader. We were all in good spirits, laughing and joking, and expecting +to be highly amused by our hosts. I promised to give Captain Brown an +account of the party; but thinking it probable that there would be more +drinking after dinner than I should like, I had arranged to ride back +alone, and ordered my servant Antonio, who followed us, to have my horse +in readiness at about four o'clock. The dinner-hour was to be two +o'clock. + +The Pastucian officers, who were more than treble our number, received +us with every mark of courtesy, though a less attractive set of +gentlemen I had never met. Indeed, they greatly resembled a party of +banditti. Their complexions were swarthy, many of them having Indian +blood in their veins. They all wore huge moustaches and beards, with +their long black hair either falling over their shoulders or fastened +behind in a queue, while their countenances were decidedly +unprepossessing. They were, however, bland in the extreme, and had +provided abundant fare, although not cooked in the most refined style. +There was no want of wine and spirits, too, with which our hosts plied +us. I remarked that there were two or three Pastucians between each of +the Patriot officers. + +Dinner went on as usual, though it was somewhat prolonged. Then +speeches were made, chiefly complimentary to each other, both parties +avoiding politics. Songs were then sung, and more speeches made. + +I, however, began to grow very tired of the affair. I was seated, I +should have said, opposite to Captain Pinson,--placed in that position, +near the head of the table, in compliment to my father being an +Englishman. While a song was being sung, I heard one of the Pastucian +officers near me say to a companion, looking meanwhile at Captain +Pinson, who had on a uniform with a large amount of lace about it, "I +have made up my mind to have that fellow's coat for my share." As the +Pastucian officer appeared already to be half-seas over, I thought that +he had spoken in jest, or that I had misunderstood him. + +On looking at my watch, I found that it was time for me to go, as the +hour at which I had ordered my horse to be brought had arrived; rising +from my seat, and going towards the window, I saw my servant leading my +horse backwards and forwards. + +I was on the point of moving towards the door, hoping to leave the room +without being questioned, when I saw Captain Pinson start up; and +turning to the other Patriot officers, he exclaimed, "Gentlemen, we are +betrayed--treachery is intended--fly for your lives!" As he said this +he drew his sword, when several of the Pastucian officers set upon him. +By a natural impulse I sprang towards the window, while I drew my sword, +intending to support my companions. Captain Pinson had moved in the +same direction, that he might have greater scope for his weapon. I was +soon convinced that he was not mistaken in his supposition that +treachery was intended, for three of the Patriot officers by this time +lay stretched on the floor, stabbed to the heart! The rest had +endeavoured to rally near Captain Pinson, who called to them to make for +the door and cut their way out. The Pastucians, who were mostly +powerful men, set so fiercely on us, however, that I saw there was but +little hope of this being accomplished, although Captain Pinson had +already killed two of them. Pistols were drawn, and the bullets now +began to fly in all directions. It would be difficult to picture a more +fearful scene. The room was full of smoke; shouts and horrible oaths +arose; while the Pastucians rushed again and again at our little band, +on each occasion unhappily bringing to the ground one or more of our +number. + +I was fighting as well as I could by Captain Pinson's side, when he said +to me, "Save yourself if you can--quick!--through the window; all hope +is gone for us." This, I feared, was too true; for just then +overwhelming numbers of Pastucians rushed into the room, armed with +spears and bayonets. Half our number had already fallen dead on the +floor; most of the others were desperately wounded, as was Captain +Pinson. I saw him plunge his sword into the breast of a third +Pastucian, who was making a lunge at me with a spear. This decided me. +Though unwilling to desert my companions, I was convinced that the +destruction of the whole of us was intended, and that I should fall a +victim with the rest. With one bound I leapt from the window, and +called to Antonio, who was on the point of galloping off. He +immediately pulled up, and rode towards me. A shower of bullets, fired +from the house, came rattling around; but in another instant I was on +horseback, and, with my faithful servant, galloping for my life. + + + +CHAPTER SIX. + +WE PASS THROUGH THE LINES--BULLETS WHISTLE PAST OUR EARS--DANGERS ON +EVERY SIDE--WE APPROACH A PASTUCIAN OUTPOST, AND TURN TO THE RIGHT TO +AVOID IT--ROUGH GROUND--A RIVER TO CROSS--PURSUED BY THE PASTUCIANS--A +TEARFUL PASSAGE--FIRED AT, AND WOUNDED--WE GET OUT OF RANGE--ANTONIO +BINDS UP MY WOUND--REACH THE CAMP--MEET MR. LAFFAN--MAKE MY REPORT-- +CARRIED TO CAPTAIN BROWN'S TENT--AN ATTACK EXPECTED--I CRAWL TO A HEIGHT +AND WITNESS THE FIGHT--THE PASTUCIANS, LED BY THE BISHOP, FIGHT BRAVELY, +BUT ARE DRIVEN BACK--OUR ARMY PURSUES--THE WOUNDED BROUGHT IN--CAPTAIN +LAFFAN AMONG THEM--WE ARE SENT BACK IN LITTERS TO POPAYAN-- +UNSATISFACTORY INTELLIGENCE FROM THE ARMY, WHICH MARCHES SOUTHWARD--THE +CITY THREATENED BY THE SPANIARDS FROM THE NORTH--WE AGAIN PREPARE FOR +THE DEFENCE OF THE CITY--THE DOMINIE SEIZED WITH FEVER--MY FATHER AND I +ARE VISITING AT DON CASSIODORO'S WHEN THE SPANIARDS ENTER THE TOWN-- +ANTONIO ESCAPES WITH THE HORSE OF A SPANISH COLONEL. + +Antonio and I had escaped the volleys fired at us, but we had yet to +pass through another shower of bullets. The house at which I had dined +was not far from the lines, and the troops stationed there would +endeavour to stop us. The gate, however, was open, to allow the passage +of some mules bringing in provisions. The shots fired at us had scared +the guards, who could not make out what was happening; but before they +had time to close the entrance, we had dashed through. In little more +than a minute the whistling of bullets passing our ears told us that the +sentries had discovered their mistake in allowing us to pass. The rim +of my hat was shot away, and two of the leaden messengers passed through +my servant's jacket; but as neither ourselves nor our steeds were hit, +we were soon beyond range of the Pastucian lines. We had, however, two +leagues to ride before we could reach the Patriot encampment. + +The horrible treachery of the Pastucian officers showed that, even +though I had come under a flag of truce, it was very probable that other +parties of the enemy whom we might encounter would not scruple to shoot +us down. I saw, therefore, that I must endeavour to avoid any of their +posts; not an easy matter, as all the roads would be guarded. At +present, however, all we could do was to gallop on to the northward. I +had fortunately noted the outlines of the mountains on either side as I +came along, and was thus able to direct my course. From the unevenness +of the ground, we ran, at the rate we were going, a great risk of +falling; but it was not a time to stop at trifles. Not only our own +lives, but the safety of the army, might depend upon our getting back. +There was no doubt that the Pastucians intended to attempt surprising +our forces; but this, if I should make good my escape, would be +prevented. + +Reaching the summit of rising ground, we now saw before us a Pastucian +outpost. I could scarcely hope to pass through it without being +questioned, as the firing from the lines would have been heard, and its +cause suspected. Our best chance of escape, therefore, was to leave the +road by turning to the right, and to make our way across the country. I +looked behind, feeling sure that we should be pursued; but as yet no +enemy was in sight in that direction, nor were we perceived by those +ahead. At first the ground was sufficiently even to allow us to +continue at full speed; but in a short time it became so rough that we +had to make our way with more caution, and finally we were compelled to +dismount and lead our horses over the rocks amid thick underwood. We +had next to pass through a forest, which covered the side of a rising +ground, but here we gained the advantage of being concealed from our +enemies. On emerging from the wood we saw below us a broad stream, +which separated the two armies; and once on the other side, we should be +in comparative safety. My intention, therefore, was to gallop down the +bill, and at once to ford or swim the stream, in the hope that we might +reach the other side before being discovered by the enemy. + +We had just remounted, when I saw to the left a considerable body of the +Pastucians, watching, I concluded, a ford in that direction. To the +right the river went foaming and roaring over a rocky bed, but there +were one or two smooth-looking places, across which I thought it +possible we might pass. The question, however, was whether we should be +able to reach a practicable spot before the Pastucians could come near +enough to fire at us. To escape their observation was almost +impossible, so not a moment was to be lost. + +"Now, Antonio," I said, "we must push on for our lives, and pray Heaven +that we may reach the bottom of the hill without breaking our necks; +then, at the first likely spot, we must push across the river. Can you +swim?" + +"Si, senor, like a fish." + +"Then, the instant our horses lose their footing, we must slip from +their backs and guide them across." + +A momentary glance showed me that the Pastucians had seen us, and were +hurrying along the bank of the river to cut us off. Keeping to the +right, therefore, we dashed forward, our horses frequently descending +several feet at a time, but alighting always on their legs. It was +almost by a miracle that we reached the bottom of the steep hill. We +then had to gallop along over rough ground until we came to a place +which afforded some prospect of crossing. There was no time to survey +it narrowly, and leading the way, sure that Antonio would follow, I +plunged in--my horse stumbling forward some distance, so that I was +afraid he would lose his footing and be carried down the stream. At +length he made a plunge, and his whole body sank under the water. I +instantly threw myself off and turned his head up the current, holding +on by one hand to the saddle, while I swam with the other. Antonio, in +the same fashion, followed close at my heels. Below us, to the right, +was a roaring waterfall, threatening instant death to us should we go +over; but the sagacious animals seemed to understand their danger, and +did their utmost to keep away from it. + +I could now see the enemy coming along the bank; they were holding their +muskets ready to fire directly they got within range of us. The bank +for which we were making was steep, but still our brave steeds might +climb it, if not too much fatigued by their swim. I shouted to Antonio +that we would lead them up, as we should gain in the end by it. + +Most thankful was I when at length I found my horse beginning to walk, +and I soon set my own feet on the ground. Even then it was no easy +matter to get along; while there was the risk that my horse, in his +struggles, would strike me with his hoofs. + +We landed at last, and taking the reins, I dragged him up the bank. +Antonio followed closely. Scarcely had we reached the top when we heard +the rattle of musketry, and several bullets struck the ground around us. +At some little distance, however, was a wood. If we could gain it, we +should be in safety; for should the enemy attempt to swim across the +stream their muskets and powder would be damaged, while we should get +well ahead before they had time to construct rafts in order to ferry +them over. + +We threw ourselves upon our horses; but scarcely had I got into my +saddle, when I heard a peculiar thud, and felt that a bullet had struck +me--whereabouts I could not for the moment tell. + +"On, on!" I shouted to Antonio. + +"O senor, you are bleeding!" he exclaimed. + +"I suppose so," I answered, "for I felt something strike me; but never +mind--on, on!" + +We dashed forward; and I was in hopes that I might retain my strength +until we could reach the camp. Another volley came rattling after us, +but we escaped being hit, and in a few seconds were in the midst of +trees, among which we made our way as fast as we could, frequently +having to leap or scramble over fallen trunks. But nothing stopped us. +It was not likely that we should encounter any of the enemy on the side +we had gained; but still it was possible, and it was necessary to keep +our eyes about us. + +I had been too much excited to feel any pain, but at length I began to +experience an uncomfortable sensation, though I would not consent to +stop and allow Antonio to bind up my wound. I did not fancy, indeed, +that it could be very severe. + +"Do, senor, allow me to bind your sash over the wound, or you will faint +from loss of blood; then it will be difficult to get you back," said +Antonio. + +At length I yielded to his persuasions. We both dismounted; and having +tethered our horses, he set scientifically to work to bandage my wound. + +"It was high time to do this, senor," he observed; "a few more minutes, +and you would have had no more blood in your veins." + +He tore off a piece of my shirt, and with a pocket handkerchief made a +pad, which he bound on my side. This increased the pain, but at the +same time it stopped the flow of blood, which was running down my +trousers into my boots. I then again mounted, though not without +difficulty, and rode on, doing my best to keep my saddle; but I had to +confess that I felt very weak. Most thankful was I, therefore, when we +came in sight of our camp. Some of the tents were pitched on a long +ridge, protected by mountains in their rear, while a steep bank sloped +down to the valley. Other tents appeared to the right, also on elevated +ground. Altogether, the position was one of considerable strength, and +well chosen. Large numbers of troops were exercising in the valley +below. + +After passing the videttes, as we rode along the southern ridge, +overlooking this valley, we saw a horseman approaching us. It proved to +be my _ci-devant_ tutor, Mr Laffan,--now holding the rank of captain. + +"What has happened, my dear Duncan?" he exclaimed as he saw me. "You +look as pale as death. Why, you must be wounded; no doubt about it." + +I gave him a brief account of what had happened; with which he was, of +course, horrified. + +"We must get the doctor to you, in the first place; then you can make +your report to the general." + +But just then we saw the general approaching, so we rode forward to meet +him. He would at first scarcely credit the fearful account I had to +give; but it was confirmed by Antonio, who described how he had seen me +leap from the window, and how the Pastucians had fired at us. + +"Have any of the officers escaped?" he asked. + +I told him I was afraid every one had been killed. + +"We must avenge them," he said; "such treachery deserves the most +complete punishment. Now go, young senor, and get your wound looked +to," he added. + +As I rode off, he summoned several of his staff, and issued orders to +prepare for an attack. + +I was carried to Captain Brown's tent. + +"I must look after you," said Captain Brown; "for had you not gone, I +should most certainly have been murdered with the rest of the poor +fellows." + +The news I brought naturally excited the greatest indignation, +especially amongst the officers and men of the regiment of the Cauca. +All hoped that the Pastucians would attack us that night. The troops +were got under arms, and every preparation was made for the battle, +though the tents were allowed to stand, in order to deceive the enemy's +scouts. + +Juan, hearing that I was wounded, came to see me, and expressed his +sorrow. + +"I thought I should have had you by my side in to-morrow's fight," he +said; "for, from what I can hear, if the Pastucians do not attack us we +shall attack them, and I hope to punish them severely for their +treachery. It is in keeping with their character, and our poor fellows +should not have trusted them." + +Neither Juan nor Mr Laffan could stay with me long, as they had to +attend to their men, and every officer was needed. Captain Brown and +Antonio looked after me, however; and the doctor assured me that, if I +remained quiet, I might be able to sit my saddle again in a few weeks. + +"A few weeks!" I exclaimed; "I thought a few days would put me to +rights, doctor." + +"For the sake of getting another bullet through you," he observed. +"Well, I will patch you up as far as I can; you must do as you think +fit." + +I lay awake, expecting every instant to hear the rattle of musketry and +the booming sound of our field-pieces, but the night seemed to be +passing away quietly. At last I dropped off to sleep. + +"If the enemy intended a night attack, they had thought better of it +when they found that you had escaped and given us warning," said Captain +Brown, when he awoke me in the morning and gave me the breakfast that +Antonio had brought. "When they do come, I must go out with my +regiment, whether ill or well; but you, Sinclair, must remain in camp-- +you will be unable to sit a horse for many days." + +From the excessive weakness I felt, I feared that he was right, but I +was much disappointed at the thought of being unable to take part in the +expected battle. + +I had been sleeping for some time, when I was awakened by the sound of +firing. No one was in the tent, for, in spite of his illness, Captain +Brown had joined his regiment and gone to the front. Weak as I was, I +thought that I could manage to crawl up to some neighbouring height, +from whence I might see what was going forward. The sound of the +rattling of musketry now came up the valley, with the louder boom of our +artillery, so I could resist the temptation no longer. Supporting +myself on a stick, therefore, with a spy-glass hanging by a strap over +my shoulders, I left the tent and made my way on, sometimes crawling on +my hands and knees, until I reached a rock overhanging the camp, where I +could lie down and rest the glass on a ledge just above me. + +Our troops crowned the heights of the opposite side of the valley. It +was not of sufficient elevation, however, to prevent me seeing over it +on to the plain beyond, where the Pastucians were moving, endeavouring +to force their way to the northward--their main body attacking our +centre, while other divisions were marching to the right and left, +evidently with the hope of outflanking the Patriots. I could clearly +distinguish the different corps. The centre stood their ground. Juan +with his cavalry drove back the enemy on the right; while the Cauca +regiment, charging, prevented the body threatening our left flank from +gaining the advantage they expected. + +Frequently the Pastucians were so near that their shot came flying +across the valley; but, their powder not being of the best, the bullets +had by that time expended their force. Among their leaders I saw +several friars; and, mounted on a fine horse, I recognised the bishop. +He and his stalwart secretary had crucifixes in their left hands and +bright swords in their right, which they kept vehemently flourishing. +Now the bishop would hold up his crucifix, and now point with his sword +at the Patriots. Then the enemy, with shrieks and shouts, would charge +right up to our men; but on each occasion they were driven back with +dreadful slaughter. Two or three monks were knocked over; still the +bishop and his lieutenant seemed to bear charmed lives. Perhaps +superstition had something to do with it, and our men were afraid to +fire at a right reverend prelate. + +At times I feared that the Patriots would give way, and on one occasion +the bishop and his followers had nearly succeeded in breaking our line; +but the regiment of the Cauca coming up, flushed with their previous +success, charged the enemy and drove them back headlong--the bishop and +his secretary, the ex-captain of dragoons, setting the example, and +scampering off at a rate which made it difficult to overtake them. I +expected to see Juan's troopers in pursuit, but he was meanwhile hotly +engaged with a body of the enemy's cavalry, which after a sharp contest +he defeated,--though they rallied again to cover the retreat of the +bishop. + +Soon after this I lost sight of the main body of our army, which had +advanced; but small parties were seen coming to the rear, bringing in +the wounded. I observed one party going towards the cavalry tents, +which were directly below me. The men were carrying an officer on a +stretcher, and as I brought my glass to bear on them I saw, to my grief, +that the wounded man was Captain Laffan. Anxious to low whether he was +much hurt, I immediately began my descent from the position, though in +doing so, in my weak state, I nearly rolled to the bottom. Fortunately +I met one of the camp-followers, who assisted me along, and by his help +I got to Laffan's tent, and found my friend in the hands of the surgeon. + +"You are where you should not be, young man!" exclaimed the latter when +he saw me. + +"But I want to know how my friend is," I said. + +"What, Duncan, my boy!" exclaimed the captain, who recognised my voice. +"I appreciate your kindness, but I wish you had remained in bed. I have +only a bullet or two through me, and a sabre-cut on my arm dealt by one +of those six rascals whom I was attacking. If there had been one less, +I should have cut them all down. As it was, three bit the ground. +Don't fear! I shall be all right, with a little plastering and +bandaging,--shall I not, doctor?" + +"Yes, yes, captain, you'll do very well; but you must keep quiet for a +few hours.--And you, Mr Sinclair, must get back to your tent." + +I endeavoured to obey the surgeon, but, overcome with exertions for +which I was ill-fitted, I sank down in a dead faint. + +"Now this is too bad of the boy, when I want to be attending his +friend," I heard the doctor say, after he had poured some cordial down +my throat, which somewhat restored me. On this, two men whom he +summoned took me up and carried me back to Captain Brown's tent. + +Towards evening, a portion of our troops returned to guard the camp, but +the main body was advancing in pursuit of the Pastucians. + +The next day less satisfactory news arrived. The enemy had been +reinforced, and the Patriot army had had no little difficulty in +maintaining its position. + +The surgeons now advised that the wounded officers who could bear the +journey should be carried back to Popayan; and as neither Captain Laffan +nor I were likely to be fit for duty for some time to come, we gladly +availed ourselves of the opportunity. We were put into litters hung on +long poles, supported on men's shoulders; and the journey occupied +several days, though I can give very little account of it. Some of the +time, indeed, I was in a semi-somnolent state, caused by weakness. + +The only striking scene I can recall was our passage on a bamboo bridge +over a river in our course. The army had crossed by a ford lower down, +where the water was shallow and the current slight. Here it was of +great depth, and the banks of considerable height. As I looked at the +slight structure, however, it appeared to me incapable of bearing more +than the weight of a single man, while a few cuts with a manchette would +have sent it into the torrent below. + +I heard Captain Laffan, who was in advance of me, cry out to his +bearers, "You don't mean to say that we are to go over that spider's-web +affair! Why! it looks as if it would give way with the weight of that +woman going along it." + +"Have no fears about the matter, senor captain; cavalry have charged +over it before now," was the answer. And, in spite of the captain's +protestations, his bearers tramped on and crossed in safety. + +I followed, and though the bamboos creaked ominously they held fast, and +no accident occurred to any of the party. It was along such a bridge as +this that the gallant Colonel Mackintosh rode at full gallop, when +leading on his brave Albions to the capture of La Plata, some time +afterwards. + +The path we took would only allow of one litter passing at a time, and I +had no conversation with the rest of the party; so, when we stopped at +night, Laffan ordered his litter to be placed alongside mine. He was in +excellent spirits, and seemed to feel his several wounds scarcely so +much as I did the single one I had received. + +"You are not so well accustomed to it, my boy, as I am. I have no extra +flesh to be annoyed, you see; and my parchment-like skin soon unites," +he observed, laughing. + +At last we arrived at Popayan. My father looked somewhat horrified when +he saw me and heard of my narrow escape. + +"I am sorry I allowed Mr Laffan and you to go," he said. "However, you +are here now, and I hope you will soon be brought round." + +"Faith, doctor, but I'm mighty glad to have seen a little more service; +and as soon as you can patch me up I'll be off again to fight for the +right cause!" exclaimed our Irish friend. + +I inquired for my mother and the rest of our relations. + +"Paul Lobo," said my father, "discovered them in a hut among the +mountains. They were all very well, and in tolerable spirits, only +somewhat anxious about us. I have sent him back again with a load of +necessary articles; and if we receive satisfactory accounts from the +army, I trust that they will return as soon as they grow weary of their +rough life. Uncle Richard, however, takes very good care of them, and +obtains abundance of provisions; but they intend, at all events, shortly +to return to the farm, from whence, should the Spaniards again overrun +the country, they can make good their retreat." + +Under my father's careful treatment Mr Laffan and I soon regained our +strength, and we became eager to rejoin the army. My father, however, +declared that I was not in a fit state to be exposed to the hardships +which I should have to endure; but that Mr Laffan might do as he liked. + +The news from the south was not altogether satisfactory. Although the +Patriots had hitherto been successful, the Pastucians had doggedly stood +their ground, and had retreated slowly--probably with the intention of +drawing them into some defiles, where they might be attacked from the +heights. At this period intelligence was received that the Spaniards +were again advancing from the north. On hearing this, the commandant of +Popayan immediately sent a despatch entreating the general to return. +Instead, however, of the whole army coming, only a few made their +appearance to assist in the defence of the town. At the same time, +troops had been collected from all quarters, and every effort had been +made to bring them into a state of efficiency. Our uncle, Dr Cazalla, +was one of the most active in preparing for the defence of the place. +He had established a manufactory for gunpowder, on a plan devised by +himself. It was one of the articles most required. He had also taught +all the blacksmiths who could be found how to repair muskets, and some +of the most expert even how to manufacture them. + +"It is a sad way of employing our strength and talents," he observed to +my father. "The same exertions rendered to the cause of peaceful +industry, might make this country rich and flourishing, instead of which +all our energies are being expended in killing one another. Still, we +are fighting for the advantage of our children; but the ruin this war +has brought upon the country cannot be repaired during our lifetime." + +The officer now in command of the city had seen no service. He may have +been a very worthy man, but he was a bad general. I have described the +chief square of the town. Most of the houses in it had been turned into +barracks, the owners having fled, some because they were Royalists, and +others in order to avoid the risk they would incur should the place be +captured by either party. + +I was now nearly quite well, as was also Mr Laffan, and he had +determined to set off next day to rejoin Juan's corps. He had, however, +over-estimated his strength; for that very evening, on returning home, +he was seized with a fever. My father insisted that he should at once +go to bed. "If you do not," he said, "I will not answer for your life." + +The dominie obeyed, but very unwillingly. His illness however, as was +proved in the sequel, was the means of saving his life. I had gone one +afternoon with my father to visit some Royalist friends living in the +great square, who had had the courage to remain in the town. My father +had attended the family, and not long before had been the means of +curing Don Cassiodoro de Corran of a dangerous disease. Though a +Spaniard, he was very liberal, and, being respected by all parties, he +ventured to remain, and the Patriots had not molested him. The young +ladies of the family were playing on their guitars, and two or three +other people having come in, we were proposing a dance, when we were +startled by the sound of musketry. Presently we heard shouts and cries, +and the trampling of horses coming down the principal street leading +from the northern gate. + +"The Godos! the Godos! the hated Spaniards! The enemy is upon us!" +shouted the people, as they rushed across the square. + +Unfortunately, the principal officers of the troops were in different +parts of the town, paying visits or amusing themselves. The soldiers, +without proper leaders, seized their arms and turned out, some coming +without ammunition, others leaving their bayonets or swords behind them. +They then attempted to form under their sergeants and such officers as +remained, but, being ill-disciplined, all was done in a hurry and +without order; and many, seized by a panic, made their escape. + +Antonio, who, I should have said, had accompanied me, rushed into the +house and begged me to fly. My father, however, insisted that I should +remain. + +"You can do nothing, and will certainly lose your life," he said. + +Antonio, who was a brave fellow, hastened out again to join his +comrades. I could not, however, resist going to the window to see what +was taking place. Presently a large body of Spanish cavalry rode into +the square, putting to flight the soldiers they first encountered, who, +scattering in every direction, attempted to seek safety in the houses. +Among others I caught sight of Antonio, who was making towards the house +he had so lately left, hotly pursued by a Spanish colonel. I +determined, if possible, to save Antonio, and asked Don Cassiodoro to +speak to the colonel. He was about to do so, when Antonio stopped and +cried out-- + +"I will surrender, senor colonel, if you will spare my life." + +"Well, well! trust to me," was the answer. + +But as the Spaniard spoke he drew a pistol from his holster; on which +Antonio, expecting the next moment to be a dead man, made a lunge at him +with his long lance, the point wounding the colonel, who the next moment +rolled from his horse. Our hero, as may be supposed, did not stop to +help him up, but leaping on his steed, galloped off, master of a good +horse and all the colonel's appointments. As he passed our windows he +waved his hand to me, and disappeared like lightning down the street. I +had great hopes that he would make his escape before the main body of +the Spaniards could enter. + +Don Cassiodoro, on seeing the colonel on the ground, went out with my +father and brought him into the house, that his wound might be attended +to. The spear had torn his coat, but, excepting a slight scratch on the +side, had not otherwise harmed him. He begged, however, that his wound +might be dressed; when Don Cassiodoro advised that he should go to bed, +which he appeared very willing to do. + +I waited, in hopes that the Patriot officers would rally the troops and +drive out the Spaniards before the arrival of the main body; for, after +all, those who had entered formed but a small party, and were +unaccompanied by infantry. So completely panic-stricken, however, had +our men become, that it was found impossible to make head against the +Spaniards; indeed, a considerable number of them had fled from the town. +Most of the officers, as well as the men, saw that their wisest course +would be to retreat to the southward, where they could join the army. +Thus Popayan once more fell into the hands of the Spaniards. + + + +CHAPTER SEVEN. + +DON CASSIODORO CONCEALS MY FATHER AND ME--FEARFUL TREATMENT OF THE +INHABITANTS BY THE SPANISH SOLDIERY--I VISIT OUR HOUSE IN DISGUISE--MR. +LAFFAN'S MODE OF PRESERVING THE HOUSE--I MEET PAUL LOBO IN DISGUISE-- +NEWS OF MY RELATIONS--HE GOES TOWARDS OUR HOME--I VISIT THE MARKET-- +NEARLY BETRAY MYSELF--PAUL TELLS US THAT DR. CAZALLA AND THE MONTEVERDES +ARE MADE PRISONERS AND SENT TO BOGOTA--PLANS FOR RESCUING THEM--I RETURN +TO DON CASSIODOROS--MY FATHER DETERMINES TO SEND MR. LAFFAN AND ME TO +BOGOTA--THE SPANIARDS SEARCH FOR MY FATHER--OUR HOST CONCEALS HIM AND +ME--I RETURN TO OUR HOUSE AND PREPARE WITH MR. LAFFAN FOR OUR +EXPEDITION--I GO BACK TO DON CASSIODORO'S, AND ASSUME THE CHARACTER OF A +YOUNG ENGLISH MILORD--THE DOMINIE AND I, ATTENDED BY DOMINGO AND LION, +START FROM THE HOTEL--JOURNEY ALONG THE VALLEY OF THE CAUCA--STOP AT +CALLI. + +A reign of terror now commenced in Popayan. The city was filled with +Spanish troops, which took up their quarters in the houses lately +occupied by the Patriots. A considerable number of the latter made +their escape, but numbers were cut down in the streets, and others were +captured and thrust into prison. The square was literally strewed with +the dead. + +My father proposed to return home, but Don Cassiodoro insisted that he +should remain. + +"You will be safe here," he said; "for no one will suspect me of being +capable of harbouring disaffected persons; and I owe you a debt of +gratitude, which I can only partially repay by concealing you from your +enemies." + +"But I am a non-combatant, and it is my duty to attend to the wounded," +said my father. + +"Can you say as much for your son?" remarked Don Cassiodoro. "Besides, +you would have no opportunity of attending to your duties, as you would +be immediately seized and sent to prison. General Calzada has been +directed by Murillo to capture all suspected persons, and to forward +them to Bogota for trial--and I may say, for execution. Be advised by +me--remain in safety here. When you are not found at your house, it +will be supposed that you have fled from the city, and the search after +you will be relaxed." + +My father at length consented to follow the advice of Don Cassiodoro, +who promised to keep him informed of all that was taking place. There +was, however, a risk that the Spanish colonel, whose wound he had +dressed, would inform against him. The only hope was, that the colonel, +who was a stranger, did not know who he was, as he spoke Spanish like a +native, and Don Cassiodoro had introduced him as his family physician, +without mentioning his name. + +I had, by my father's directions, resumed my civilian dress, as had also +Mr Laffan, who was, I should have said, at this time safe in our house. +There was, however, much probability that the Spanish soldiers, on +entering to plunder the house, might wantonly kill him, and burn it +down. + +That night, it may be supposed, was one of intense anxiety. We could +gain no tidings of any of our friends, for had we gone out the danger +would have been great, as the Spanish soldiers were ranging through the +town, constantly firing at the windows of houses supposed to be +inhabited by Patriots, and killing all the persons they met with in the +streets. We were especially anxious about our uncle, Dr Cazalla, and +also about Senor Monteverde and Dona Dolores. They had all been in the +city on the previous day, and, we feared, could not have been warned of +the entry of the Spaniards in sufficient time to make their escape. + +All night long the sounds of shots were heard in different parts of the +town, and fearful shrieks and cries arose as some of the unfortunate +citizens were being dragged forth from their dwellings, including old +men, women, and even little children, to be slaughtered by the savage +soldiery; while here and there great sheets of flame shot up, showing +that a number of houses had been set on fire. Such were the terrible +scenes which took place, not only at Popayan, but in nearly all the +principal towns of the province, when they fell into the hands of the +Spaniards. + +A guard had been placed at the door of Don Cassiodoro's house by General +Calzada, under the plea that a Spanish officer lay wounded within. The +house was thus, indeed, safe from attack, but we were effectually +prevented from going out to obtain intelligence. + +Towards morning the trumpet sounding recalled the soldiers to their +quarters, and we could distinctly see them crossing the square laden +with plunder. The Spanish general, having frightened the inhabitants +into something like submission, was now endeavouring to restore order +among the troops. Had the Patriot army been near enough to enter the +city during the night, they might have retaken it, and captured or +destroyed every one of their enemies. + +The next day the Spanish colonel, feeling himself very well--indeed, his +wound was of the most trivial nature--desired to go forth, that he might +visit the general and report his proceedings. Don Cassiodoro, who was +anxious to get rid of him, did not object, and the colonel took his +departure. As soon as he was gone, I begged that my father would allow +me to go and learn what had become of Mr Laffan, Dr Cazalla, and other +friends. + +"But you will run a risk of being captured, if not of being injured or +killed," said my father. + +I told Don Cassiodoro what I wished to do, and one of the young ladies +suggested that I should put on the livery of a stable-boy who happened +to have been sent away into the country sick some time before. I gladly +accepted the proposal, and Jose's dress being procured, I found that it +fitted me exactly. Don Cassiodoro charged me to refrain from answering +questions; but if pressed, I was to say I was one of his servants. It +was proposed that I should wait until the evening, as there would be +less risk of being recognised; but dressed as I was, I thought that no +one could possibly know me: besides, poor Mr Laffan might in the +meantime be starving. Before leaving, I filled my pockets with +eatables, supposing it likely that all the provisions in the house had +been carried away. + +Taking a whip in my hand, I went out by a side door when no one was +near, and then walked along with as jaunty an air as I could assume. A +number of people of the lower orders were moving about, but none of the +citizens who had escaped were anywhere to be seen. There were also +soldiers with parties of slaves or Indians, whom they were compelling to +carry off the dead bodies in order that they might be buried outside the +town. Foraging-parties had also been sent out, and were now returning, +driving in the peasantry with provisions, for the general had given +orders to establish a market in the place. The crowd was an advantage, +as I was able to make my way without being noticed. + +I hurried on, and soon reached our own house, which appeared not to have +been entered. All the doors and windows were fast closed, though I saw +that they had been struck by several musket-balls. Going round to the +courtyard, I climbed over the gate, a feat I had performed often before. +I knocked gently, when a bark from within assured me that Lion was +acting as guardian of the house. + +"Who's there?" asked a voice which I recognised as that of Mr Laffan. + +"Duncan," I replied; and presently I heard the bolts withdrawn. Mr +Laffan started back, for he did not recognise me; but Lion, rushing past +him, began to leap up and lick my face and hands. + +"For the moment I didn't know you, Duncan," said Mr Laffan. "Thankful +I am that you have escaped; for I have been in a mighty fright about you +and your father since the Spaniards entered the place. Come in, come +in, and tell me all about it." I then went in, and he again closed and +bolted the door. + +"We have been equally anxious about you," I replied; "how did you +escape?" + +"By bolting all the doors so that the villains could not break them open +without a battering-ram, then hanging a British flag out of the window +and shouting, `Vive el Roy! If any one comes in here, he will bring +down the vengeance of England on his head.' I don't know which had the +most effect, the flag, the loyal shout, or the threat of vengeance, but +one party after another of the rascals turned away; so, you see, if you +and your father had been here you would have escaped. Poor Lion and I, +however, have been somewhat on short commons. I shared what I could +find in the house with the faithful brute, as was but fair." + +"I suspected that such might be the case," I said, producing what I had +brought in my pockets; of which Mr Laffan eagerly ate a portion, and +bestowed the rest upon Lion, who gobbled it up in a few seconds, showing +how hungry he was. As what I had brought could do little more than +stimulate their appetites, I offered at once to go out and buy some +provisions, which I could do very well in my character of a stable-boy. +Fortunately I had some money in my pocket. I started immediately, +intending afterwards to visit Dr Cazalla, as also the house in which +Senor Monteverde and Dona Dolores had been residing, although I did not +expect to find any of them. + +As I was proceeding along the streets, I saw an old black man. His only +clothing was a broad-brimmed hat, and a pair of loose drawers fastened +round his waist by a girdle, to which was hung his manchette. He came +along driving a mule laden with bamboo-canes, such as are constantly +sold in the town for piping and other purposes. I was going to pass +him, when I saw him look very hard at me, and heard him utter my name in +a low tone of voice, which I thought I recognised. A smile passed over +his countenance, and on looking round and observing no one near, he +said-- + +"I am better disguised dan you, Senor Duncan." + +By his voice I at once recognised Paul Lobo. + +"Are my mother, sister, Don Ricardo, and the rest well?" I asked. + +"Yes, yes, I hab a good account to give ob dem," he replied; "but tell +me, has el senor doctor escaped, and is de house safe?" + +"Yes," I replied. + +"Den come on with me, for I hab much to tell you, and we may be +discovered if seen speaking here." + +I said that I had to go to the market and obtain some food, and that I +wished to inquire about my uncle, Dr Cazalla, and the Monteverdes. + +"Buy de food, by all means, but do not venture to make furder inquiries; +I can tell you all you want to know," he said. + +Seeing some one approaching, he drove on his mule, singing out, "Who +wants to buy canes--sound straight canes?" though he did not stop for +any one to answer him. + +I hastened to the market-place. Provisions were but scant, the soldiers +having appropriated most of what was brought in. However, I got as much +as I wanted, although I nearly betrayed myself by the ignorance I +displayed in making my purchases. With a basket on my shoulder, which I +had bought, I returned homewards. Several persons cast inquiring +glances at me; and a Spanish sergeant eyed me very narrowly, I thought. +But I went whistling along, as if free from care, and he did not stop to +put questions to me. I was thankful when I got back to the courtyard, +where I found Paul Lobo standing by his mule. Both he and Mr Laffan, +and Lion too, were very glad to get some of the provisions I had +brought. + +"And now, Paul," I said, "what information have you to give me?" + +"Berry sorry to say, not good. I hear as I come 'long dat all de gates +are guarded, so dat no one can go out ob de city; dat de general gib +orders to take up eberybody in de place who can read and write, no +matter who dey are. They hab already got hold ob el senor Doctor +Cazalla, Senor Monteverde, and his daughter. General Calzada, him +pretty good man and not like to shoot people, so dey send dem all to +General Murillo at Bogota; and he, dey say, kill for de pleasure ob +killing. Depend 'pon it, dey come to look for senor doctor; so he mus' +hide away, and not show his face till de Patriots come back--and dat dey +do, I hope, 'fore long." + +"This is indeed bad news; I will go back to my father and tell him what +you say, Paul," I answered. "But do you think it would be possible to +rescue Doctor Cazalla and the Monteverdes?" + +Paul replied that they had already, from what he could learn, been sent +out of the city, and were on their way to Bogota. + +I proposed to hasten immediately to the army and let Juan know, in the +hope that, by a forced march, he might be able to intercept the escort +and rescue the prisoners. But both Paul and Mr Laffan declared that it +would be impossible: that I could not obtain a horse, as the Spaniards +had taken possession of all those found in the city; and that if I could +get one, I should not be able to pass through the gates of the city. + +We talked over the subject, but could think of no plan likely to +succeed. I was in despair. I felt, however, that I must immediately +return to my father and give him the information Paul had brought; he +would, perhaps, be able to devise some plan more likely to succeed than +any I could form. As it was certain that our house would be searched, I +advised Mr Laffan to try and gain some place of concealment where he +and Lion might remain, assuring him that Paul Lobo would find the means +of supplying them with food. + +"No, no; I'll stop and defend the house to the last. The plundering +rascals will hesitate before they attempt to break-in," he answered. +"We have four muskets and three brace of pistols, and I shall be able to +give a good account of a dozen or move of them if they make the attempt. +If they come with authority to search for your father, I intend that +they shall find me seated at table writing despatches to the English +Government; and I shall have the same flag I used before hung over my +head. If they inquire for the doctor, I'll tell them the fact, that he +left this house some hours before they came into the city; and that if +he has a swift horse, he is probably leagues away to the north, south, +east, or west, to join his family. If that does not satisfy them, I'll +shrug my shoulders, send a puff of smoke in their faces from my cigar, +and go on writing my despatches." + +I could not help laughing at the honest Irishman's coolness. His plan +seemed the best that could be adopted, and I hoped that it might +succeed. Paul said he should remain with his mule in the courtyard, and +should the Spaniards come to the house, he would move away crying his +wares, hoping thus to escape being questioned. + +Fortunately I had told neither Mr Laffan nor Paul that my father was at +Don Cassiodoro's; although, seeing me in the livery of that family, they +might have suspected where he was. As it was important to get back to +Don Cassiodoro's without delay, and finding that no one was near, I +slipped out at the gate, and passing along some back streets, made my +way to his house. + +My father was greatly grieved when he heard that Doctor Cazalla and the +Monteverdes had been arrested and sent off to Bogota. He was too well +acquainted with General Murillo's bloodthirsty nature not to feel the +greatest possible fear for their safety. + +"That Spanish tiger has sworn to stamp out every spark of liberty in the +land, and to destroy all those who are capable of rekindling it," he +observed; "we must, however, try what can be done. Let me consider." + +He was silent for a quarter of an hour or more. At last, looking up, he +said, "Duncan, I can trust to your judgment and energy, and also to +those of Mr Laffan. I will send you and him to Bogota, with letters to +various friends who are likely to interest themselves on behalf of the +prisoners. They may be the means of preserving their lives for the +present, and of ultimately obtaining their liberty." + +"I am ready to start this instant," I replied; "so is Mr Laffan, I am +sure, for the excitement he has gone through has cured his fever. We +may push on ahead, and get there before them." + +"Neither are you nor Mr Laffan in a fit state to make a forced march," +he answered; "you must preserve your health, else you may be unable to +render the service you desire. I intend that you should travel in the +character of a young English gentleman, with Mr Laffan as your tutor. +You must speak no Spanish; and he knows quite enough to get on perfectly +well." + +We had just arranged the whole plan, and I had agreed to go back and +explain it to Mr Laffan, when Don Cassiodoro hurriedly entered the +room. + +"My dear doctor," he exclaimed, "some Spanish officials are at the door, +and from the information I have received I fear that they have come to +arrest you. Follow me instantly. Take up these writing materials and +everything that belongs to you; there's not a moment to lose. Let your +son come too; were he to be seen, they would at once conclude that you +were here." + +Don Cassiodoro leading the way, my father and I followed him to an upper +story, and entered an unfurnished room. "If the don requires us to stay +here, we shall certainly be discovered," I thought. But I was mistaken. +Drawing aside a panel in the wall, he disclosed a recess; then pointing +upwards, he showed us a broad shelf at the top. + +"How are we to get up there?" asked my father. + +Don Cassiodoro pulled down a small ladder. "Draw this up after you," he +said, "and place it along the side. You will find that there is a cover +which may be let down, and which will completely conceal you. Should +those seeking you chance to discover the panel and enter the recess, +they might search round it, and yet not suppose that you were within." + +My father wrung the don's hand and expressed his gratitude. We +immediately climbed up, and drawing the ladder after us, then let down +the lid,--for so I may call it,--which made the surface look exactly +like a broad beam running from one side of the house to the other. A +more perfect hiding-place could scarcely have been devised, as no +stranger, unless treachery had been at work, was likely to discover it. + +We heard Don Cassiodoro's footsteps as he descended the stairs. Soon +afterwards voices from below reached us. The door of the room had been +ostentatiously left open. Don Cassiodoro's voice rose above that of his +unwelcome visitors as he complained of the insult offered him, and at +the want of confidence placed in his loyalty. The officers must have +been, by some means or other, informed that my father was in the house, +as they persisted in searching every room. + +"He is nowhere below, but we shall probably unkennel him in the upper +story," I heard one of them say as they mounted the stairs. + +They at last entered the room. + +"Where can that rascally English doctor be?" exclaimed one of them. "He +was too wise to hide in his own house; but if he is not here, where is +he?" + +"Never fear, we shall catch him somewhere," observed another; "and we +shall have the pleasure of seeing the Republican heretic shot, to repay +us for our trouble." + +From these remarks I knew that our house must have been searched +directly after I left it, and that I had had a very narrow escape. I +was in hopes that something would have been said to inform me of what +had happened to Mr Laffan; but no remark was made on the subject. I +could only hope that Mr Laffan's plan had succeeded, and that they had +been afraid to touch him. The long-coated, grave-looking dominie would +never have been suspected of having lately acted the part of a dashing +lancer. + +We lay listening and perfectly still, for as we could hear everything +that was said, we knew that the slightest noise might have betrayed us. + +"Are you convinced, gentlemen, that the English doctor is not here?" I +heard Don Cassiodoro ask. "Now, I desire you to apologise to me for +your intrusion. The general knows best whether it would be politic to +shoot a skilful surgeon and an Englishman, who is willing and able to +heal the wounds of the loyal subjects of King Ferdinand as well as of +rebels. My belief is, that although he may love liberty in the +abstract, he is too much engaged in his professional duties to interfere +in any way in politics." + +At length we heard the front door close, and Don Cassiodoro returned to +the recess to tell us that we might come down, but that my father must +be ready to return to his place of concealment at a moment's notice. +"And you, young sir," he said, turning to me, "it will be wise in you to +keep out of the way of General Calzada; for, should he find out whose +son you are, he might seize you as a hostage for the doctor." + +On this, my father told Don Cassiodoro that he was anxious to send me +and my tutor to Bogota, and that under the circumstances it would be +safer for us to travel under assumed names. + +Don Cassiodoro at once agreed to render all the assistance in his power; +for he saw that the sooner I could set off the better. So, in the first +place, as it was necessary to obtain a couple of horses, he immediately +undertook to supply us from his own stud, and also to advance any money +we might require. + +While my father was writing the letters, I hastened back to our own +house, being still dressed as a groom. I found Mr Laffan seated at the +table as he proposed, with a flag over his head. The house, as I had +fully expected, had been visited and searched, but had not been +plundered. Probably the officers had been forbidden to plunder it, in +order that my father might be the more easily enticed back. + +On hearing the proposed plan, Mr Laffan sprang to his feet, and +declared that he was ready at once to proceed. The question was, What +was to be done with the house? + +"Leave dat to me," said Paul; "me find honest woman who fight like one +panther 'fore she let any one come into de house." + +As a precautionary measure, we concealed all the most valuable articles +we could find; leaving, however, a few silver forks and spoons to +mislead plunderers, who might suppose that they were the only things in +the house worth taking. + +The dominie--for so I may again call him--having dressed in as +appropriate a style as possible, as the tutor of a young English milord, +and Lobo having warned us that the coast was clear, we left the house to +proceed to a posada where Don Cassiodoro had arranged to send the +horses. I carried the valise containing Mr Laffan's wearing apparel. +My own was in the provision-basket on my back. The load, I must say, +was rather a heavy one. Lion rushed out with us. At first I thought of +leaving him as a guard to the house, but he seemed to have made up his +mind to come, and Mr Laffan advised me to take him. "The noble brute +may render us good service on our journey, and I would sooner have him +than half a dozen guards, who would be very likely to rob us, or run +away if we were attacked." Lion wagged his tail and showed every sign +of satisfaction when he understood that I intended to take him with me. + +On arriving at the posado, the dominie put a piece of money into my +hand, as if to pay me for having carried his valise; and I heard him +tell the landlord that he was waiting for a young English milord, who +was anxious to return home by way of Bogota. I then hurried back to Don +Cassiodoro's, where I resumed my proper costume. To prevent my being +recognised, my father had provided a pair of huge whiskers and +moustaches, and by careful painting he made me look considerably older +than I was. With the aid of a few additions to my costume, I certainly +looked as I had never done before. Even the young ladies, when I came +downstairs, did not at first recognise me. My father, having given me +all needful instructions, supplied me with a purse and the letters he +had written; while Don Cassiodoro put into my hands a passport, which he +had obtained at considerable risk of implicating himself. He then +ordered a servant to strap my valise on the saddle of my horse, while +another mounted servant led the horse intended for the dominie. + +"That man is as true as steel," observed Don Cassiodoro. "You cannot +proceed without an attendant, and I have directed him to accompany you. +You will find Domingo of the greatest use. He believes you to be what +you profess to be. I have charged him not to let it be known that he is +in my service, so as to prevent inconvenient questions." + +We reached the posada without being stopped. + +"I am so glad my dear young lord has come," said the dominie, turning to +the host; "for though the Royalists have gained the day at present, we +do not know how soon those dreadful Republicans may have the upper +hand." + +"Truly, truly," answered the landlord, bowing to me. "Milord will be +glad to return to England, where all, I am told, are true Royalists." + +"Milord does not understand much Spanish," observed Mr Laffan; "we must +wish you farewell." + +As we might have risked discovery by further delay, we rode forward; +Domingo, armed to the teeth, following us. Mr Laffan, I found, had two +brace of pistols in his holsters, and a sword, which he kept concealed +under his cloak. I, of course, carried one in my character of a young +gentleman of fortune, and I also had a brace of pistols; so that we were +tolerably well-armed. Mr Laffan, who had taken the passport, produced +it with a flourish at the gates, and begged that milord might not be +troubled with unnecessary delay. The officer on guard bowed politely, +and we were allowed to pass. I had little expected to get on so well, +but no one seemed to suspect our character. + +As soon as we were out of sight of the city, we pushed forward, anxious +to get as far as we could before nightfall. Our road was to be due +north for a considerable distance, along the banks of the Cauca. After +this we were to turn to the right over the Quindio mountains to reach +Bogota. Our great object was to push on to such a distance from +Popayan, that I might not run the risk of being recognised by any +persons who knew me. The letters I carried were couched in such +language, that had they fallen into the hands of the Spaniards I should +still have been safe. They spoke of me as a young Englishman of fortune +who had come over to see the beauties of the country, and who proposed +to spend a short time at Bogota on his way down the Magdalena to +Cartagena, from whence he expected to embark for England. They +requested that the friends to whom they were addressed would render him +every assistance in carrying out the objects of his journey, especially +in obtaining any information he might desire. They were mostly +addressed to well-known Royalists, still better to conceal my real +object. + +I cannot stay to describe the numerous incidents of the journey. The +first night we stopped at the house of the padre of a village. I found +him to be a man of liberal sentiments, from what he said to Mr Laffan; +though, keeping up my character, I did not venture to speak. At first I +felt surprised at this; but I afterwards discovered that he possessed a +Bible, which he constantly studied. + +"You Englishmen appreciate the book," he observed to my tutor; "but I +have, on several occasions, been compelled to hide it, lest I should be +accused of being an enemy to Spain." + +Continuing our journey, we travelled along the base of the Cordilleras, +which towered to the skies on our right. The scenery was most +magnificent. From a height we had reached we cast our eyes over the +beautiful valley, with one or two large villages near us, and the pretty +town of Calli in the distance. We made our way towards it, though it +was somewhat out of our direct course. The inhabitants were generally +supporters of the Liberal cause, and had suffered greatly from the +Spaniards. As we got close to the bridge we stopped to inquire which +was the principal inn in the place. Crossing the bridge, we rode +through the streets of the neat little town in search of a posada, at +which we agreed that it would be more prudent to stop than with a +resident, as I might thus be able to gain much more information from the +conversation of the visitors than I could at the house of a private +person. Everywhere the town exhibited traces of the visit of an enemy. +Many of the houses were deserted, others had been burned to the ground. +Several were in ruins, and the walls, in many places, were bespattered +with bullet-marks. + +Domingo took our horses round to the shed which served as a stable, +while we entered the public room, the centre of which was occupied by a +long table with rough benches on either side, at which several persons-- +merchants, small traders, and carriers--were seated. Mr Laffan +requested to be supplied with food, and asked if we could have a room in +which our hammocks could be slung up. + +The landlord assured him that the whole house was at our command. + +"Yes," said Mr Laffan, "but we would rather have a room to ourselves. +This young English milord likes to be quiet." + +The landlord examined me with a curious look, and said he should be +happy to clear out a room at present occupied by some of his family. + +I asked Mr Laffan to tell me what the landlord had said, and in reply +begged to assure him that I would not on any account put his estimable +family to so much inconvenience; that we would, therefore, sling our +hammocks at the further end of the hall. + +He was not long in placing a very fairly concocted olla-podrida before +us. It consisted of beef, fowls, bacon, mutton, and a variety of +vegetables, all cooked together, and tolerably free from garlic. The +landlord remarked, as he tasted it before us, "I am aware that the +English do not like much of that root, as I discovered by observing the +expressions of disgust exhibited by the countenances of some British +officers for whom I had prepared a dish with rather more, perhaps, than +the usual allowance of seasoning. One of them declared that he was +poisoned, and compelled me, at the point of his sword, to eat the whole +of it; while another clapped the dish upside down on my head, and +insisted on my producing some other food of a less savoury character. I +have remembered ever since that Englishmen do not like garlic." + +While the landlord was talking, I endeavoured to listen to the +conversation going on at the other part of the table. I gathered from +it some satisfactory news. Bolivar was again in arms, and at the head +of a considerable force, with which he had been successful in Venezuela, +and was marching towards New Granada. I earnestly hoped that he might +capture Bogota before the Spaniards had put our friends to death. Once +or twice I was tempted to ask questions, and only recollected just in +time that I was supposed not to understand Spanish. Some of the men at +the supper-table eyed me, I fancied, narrowly; but whether they +suspected who I was, or were considering whether it would not be +profitable to rob the young English milord, I could not make out. + +Mr Laffan and Domingo having secured our hammocks, we turned in, with +our pistols by our sides, while Lion took up his usual post under where +we lay. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHT. + +OUR JOURNEY CONTINUED--A SNAKE KILLED--ABUNDANCE OF ANIMAL LIFE--PAUCITY +OF INHABITANTS--BLACK HERDSMEN--VEGETABLE PRODUCTIONS OF THE CAUCA +VALLEY--BEAUTIFUL SCENE NEAR CARTAGO--WE ENTER CARTAGO--A WRETCHED +POSADA--MR. LAFFAN SEARCHES FOR CARRIERS--A SUSPICIOUS CHARACTER--THE +SILLEROS--ARRANGEMENTS FOR CROSSING THE MOUNTAINS--THE OFFICER TELLS US +OF THE ESCAPE OF DONA DOLORES--A MIDNIGHT ROBBER--LION KEEPS GUARD--WE +HAVE CAUSE TO BE UNEASY--THE SPANISH OFFICER STARTS BEFORE US--OUR +JOURNEY OVER THE QUINDIO MOUNTAINS COMMENCED--A RUINED VILLAGE. + +We left Calli at daybreak, before the rest of the guests were astir. I +was not altogether satisfied that we had escaped detection; and from the +appearance of some of the characters at the supper-table, I thought it +possible that an attempt might be made to rob us. How Domingo might +act, I could not tell; but I was very sure that, in the event of being +attacked by banditti, Mr Laffan would prove to them that they had +caught a Tartar. The road we traversed was as bad as could be. +Sometimes our horses descended the hills almost on their haunches; at +others we were compelled to dismount and lead them up the steep +inclines. We had several streams to cross; some we were able to ford, +others were spanned by wooden bridges. One of these was thrown over a +rapid river which flowed at the foot of some steep and huge rocks, above +which was a level space with inaccessible-hills on either side. + +"That would form a good military post," observed Mr Laffan, pointing to +the spot. "Either our friends or our enemies will take possession of it +one of these days, and it will prove a hard matter to drive them out." + +I noted the spot, as well as his remark. + +At the next stream we came to, which was a more tranquil one than the +former, we had an adventure. As we were crossing it, we observed a +large snake swimming towards us. On it came, with its head and part of +its body raised out of the water. On nearing us it stopped, apparently +watching our motions. I then knew, by the black cross which I observed +on its neck, that it was of the species called aquis, one of the boldest +and most venomous of the serpents of that region. Mr Laffan, not +liking the creature's appearance, and naturally thinking it intended to +attack us, drew his pistol. + +"You had better not, senor," cried Domingo; "you are very likely to +miss, and the brute will come after us. Let me take it in hand. Please +hold my horse." + +Domingo dismounting, ran a short distance, to a place where we saw a +number of bamboos growing. He cut one with his sword, and then advanced +to fulfil his promise. The aquis had all the time remained perfectly +quiet, with its eyes fixed on us. As Domingo approached, the creature +put out its forked tongue, and raised itself higher in the water, as if +preparing to make a dart at its enemy. On this, Domingo retired to a +distance; but he and the snake continued to watch each other for some +minutes. Suddenly the aquis turned round, and began to swim to the +other side of the river. The moment Domingo observed its head turned +from him he rushed to the bank, and before it got beyond his reach gave +it three or four tremendous blows with the bamboo, which made it turn on +its back. Then following up the attack, he succeeded in killing the +creature. On measuring it, we found that it was upwards of six feet in +length. + +"It never does to run from these creatures," observed Domingo, as he +remounted; "they will follow even a horse for a league or more, and move +as rapidly, provided the ground is not too dry." + +In the meadows we observed large numbers of fine cattle. + +"Ah, senor, you might have seen twice as many before the Spaniards +passed by," said Domingo; "but they slaughtered all they could get, +sometimes merely for the sake of their tongues. It is a pity that the +people should have rebelled against their lawful sovereign; and this is +the consequence." + +Mr Laffan made no reply. It was as well, for our purpose, that Domingo +should appear so loyal. + +In the woods, and often flying across the valley, we saw various kinds +of birds, macaws and parrots; some of the latter had yellow plumage on +the breast, wings, and tail, and red feathers on the head. We also met +with wild turkeys, grouse, and partridges in large numbers; and we +frequently caught sight of deer scampering over the hills. But +sometimes, during a whole day, we did not pass a single house of any +size, while the cottages of the peasantry were scattered at long +distances from each other. + +As we proceeded down the valley, however, we saw a number of neat +country-houses and cottages; while the soil appeared to be fruitful in +the extreme, and nothing could surpass the beauty of the scenery. The +numbers of the cattle also increased. They were under the charge of +black slaves, who were riding about looking after them. We saw neither +Creoles nor Indians: the latter had made their escape to the forests and +mountains, and the former had been carried off to serve in either the +one army or the other. The appearance of the blacks on horseback was +singular. On their heads they wore large straw hats, while their bodies +were covered by a cloak made of rushes, which served to keep out both +the heat and the rain. Their legs were bare, but their feet were +protected by sandals, to which were fastened spurs of huge dimensions. +Each man carried by his left side a long manchette, or sword-knife, +secured to his girdle. They were all galloping as hard as they could +go, wheeling their horses round and then halting in a moment. + +"Those fellows would make useful cavalry, if they could be got to face +the enemy; and I should like to find myself at the head of a thousand of +them," observed Mr Laffan. "We should give a good account of any of +the Spanish lancers we might fall in with." + +Soon after this, on the shores of a small lake, we came upon a curious +tree, which Mr Laffan pronounced to be the wax-palm, or the _Ceroxilon +andicola_. From its appearance I should have supposed that it could +only grow in the very warmest regions; but it is of so happy a +constitution that it flourishes equally well in temperate and in cold +climates. We afterwards found some on the mountains of Quindio. They +are the most hardy of the Palm tribe: where others would perish, or +assume a dwarfed or stunted form, the wax-palm raises its stem, in the +form of an elegantly-wrought column, a hundred and fifty feet high, with +a splendid leafy plume. From the leaves and trunk exudes a grey and +acrid matter, which on drying assumes the nature of wax as pure as that +of bees, but rather more brittle. I have seen tallow-candles surrounded +by a thin coating of this wax, which, not melting as rapidly as the +tallow, prevents the candle from guttering. + +The valley of the Cauca abounds with bamboo-cane, which serves a variety +of purposes. With the bamboo the inhabitants build their houses, and +erect a pretty kind of fence around their farms. The peasantry make +with it sweet-sounding flutes; it furnishes them also with +drinking-cups, water-buckets, and bird-cages, chairs and baskets, +blow-pipes and arrows. With the canes also large rafts are built for +carrying cocoa and other produce down the rivers even as far as the +ports of embarkation, where the rafts themselves are disposed of to +advantage. As cattle abound, ox-hides are made use of for all sorts of +domestic purposes. Tables are covered with them, and also sofas, +chairs, bedsteads, doors, and trunks. Cut into strips, they form +lassoes, greatly in use among the cattle-keepers of the plains. They +are formed into bottles, too, for wine and chica; and with them also, +stretched on poles, hand-barrows are constructed for carrying earth and +rubbish. + +We met in this region a number of horses and mules without ears, and +others with their ears lying flat on their necks. On inquiring the +reason, we found that this was occasioned by an insect like a wood-louse +getting inside them, and which is as prolific as the chigua in the toes +of human beings. These insects gradually devour the nerves of the ear, +which then falls off. To prevent this, the muleteers rub the inside of +the animal's ears with hog's lard, to which the insect has a decided +aversion. + +Even this paradise was not perfect. We caught sight of several +tiger-cats, jaguars, and pumas, which come down and commit depredations +on the flocks and herds; and occasionally a huge black bear will descend +from his mountain lair and pay a visit to the hog-pen, though he runs a +risk of being shot by the watchful owner. + +Having all my life lived in the high regions of New Granada, I was not +prepared for the perfectly tropical scenery I now for the first time +beheld. I remember one spot by the side of the Cauca, just before we +reached Cartago. The sepos, or rope-like vines, hung from the lofty +branches of the trees, and beautifully-coloured parasitical plants were +suspended in the air. Gaily-tinted macaws flew across the blue sky, and +other birds of the gayest plumage flitted here and there. There were +several plants of the cacti species on the borders of the stream, on the +shores of which were seen the bamboo-dwellings of the inhabitants, with +palms and other graceful trees rising above them; while long-tailed +monkeys swung to and fro on the creepers, which seemed arranged +specially for their amusement. + +Soon after this we reached the town of Cartago, from which we were to +strike upwards over the Quindio mountains. The town was of considerable +size, and at one time, I have no doubt, was as flourishing as others in +the province. The curse of war had fallen upon it. Many of the houses +were empty,--their owners having been killed on their own thresholds, or +carried off to be shot, or sent to work at the fortifications of +Cartagena or other places on the coast. I saw here a larger number of +slaves--negroes and negresses--than at any other place we had passed +through. The latter were dressed in blue petticoats, without any other +garments. They came in numbers from the river-side, carrying huge +pitchers or leathern bottles of water on their heads, and walking +gracefully and perfectly upright. I remember a group we passed in the +outskirts of the town, who appeared to take life very easily: the women, +in the most scanty raiment, with huge necklaces, were seated on the +ground chatting and laughing; the men, their only garment a shirt, were +lazily smoking their cigars. Forgetting that I was to be ignorant of +Spanish, I spoke to them, when, turning round, I saw a person passing in +the uniform of an officer. He looked at me for a moment, but making no +remark, passed on, and I thought no more about the matter. + +Only a very small remnant, I should say, of the ancient inhabitants now +remain, though the traces of their former existence are everywhere to be +seen, showing that at one time they must have been very numerous. They +have been destroyed in vast numbers by the severity of their relentless +and avaricious taskmasters. Thousands and tens of thousands of poor +Indians have perished from famine, the sword, and the pestilence, or +have died with hearts broken by the loss of liberty, or from being +compelled to labour in the gold-mines with constitutions unequal to the +performance of their hard task-work. + +We were, of course, anxious not to stay an hour longer at Cartago than +was necessary; and yet it might seem strange to the inhabitants that an +Englishman, travelling for the sake of amusement, should not wish to +remain a sufficient time in the town even to form a correct opinion of +it. The posada was a wretched one, but there were few people in it. +The old woman who kept it declared that the Spaniards had carried off +all her property; indeed, except a few red earthenware plates, I could +see nothing on which our supper could be served. I sat down in a corner +of the room, and pretended to be reading an English book; while Mr +Laffan went out to arrange for guides, silleros, and peons, to enable us +to travel over the Quindio mountains. From what our old landlady said, +I guessed that she was a Liberal; but, of course, I thought it best not +to trust her. The silleros are chairmen, the peons carry the baggage. +It was not necessary, we found, to leave our horses behind, though it +might be dangerous to ride them. At the same time, if it had not been +important to keep up our character as travellers, I should not have +hesitated to push over the mountains with a single guide to show the +way. + +While I was waiting for Mr Laffan's return, a Spanish officer entered +the posada, and in a dictatorial tone ordered supper, although it was an +early hour for that meal. He then eyed me narrowly, and inquired of the +old woman who I was. It struck me that he was the person I had seen +while I was talking to the natives. + +"An English milord going over the Quindio mountains to Bogota," was the +answer--being the information Domingo had given her. + +Turning towards me, he inquired if such were the case. I was very +nearly replying, when I remembered that I did not speak Spanish, and I +made signs to let him know that my companion would soon return and +inform him all about the matter. Finding that he could make nothing of +me, he paced up and down the room, his sword clanking on the hard mud +floor. Whenever he came near me, Lion gave a low growl, and appeared as +if about to spring on him. There was something in the tone of his +voice, or the appearance of the man, which evidently the sagacious +animal did not like. Soon after an orderly appeared, conducting a +sillero and two peons--the sillero was a fine strong-built man in a +loose dress. + +The captain told them that he meant to start next morning at daybreak to +go across the mountains, and that they must reach Ibaque in five days. + +"Impossible," was the answer. "Six is the least in which the journey +can be performed. Except with the greatest exertion, it requires +seven." + +"I must start at daybreak to-morrow morning, and my orders must be +obeyed. Go! the sergeant will look after you." + +The soldier retired with the men, who, I found, were his prisoners; and +in a short time Mr Laffan appeared, and said that he had arranged with +two silleros and five peons, three of whom were to lead the horses, and +the other two to carry our baggage. + +"Domingo will have to walk, and so must we, if we wish to push on fast," +he observed. "They can go on ahead, and we can overtake them at the +foot of the mountains," he added. + +This was satisfactory intelligence. I then told him what I had heard +the Spanish officer saying; that he seemed an ill-tempered fellow; and +that we must be on our guard towards him. + +The captain, after having discussed his supper, put the same questions +to Mr Laffan that he had put to me. + +My tutor told him the story agreed on. "Oh!" he said, "you will follow +me, for I must carry intelligence of the proceedings of the rascally +rebels to Bogota." + +"A pleasant journey to you then, colonel," said Mr Laffan, giving him a +higher title than was his due. "We Englishmen, unaccustomed to your +wild mountains, cannot travel so fast." + +I begged Mr Laffan to inquire what news the officer could give us. + +"Very satisfactory," he answered; "the rebels are everywhere defeated, +and many of their leaders have been taken prisoners. The only +unfortunate circumstance has been the escape of some of the prisoners +who were being sent to Bogota by the way of La Plata. Among others +rescued is that intriguing lady, Dona Dolores Monteverde." + +I tried to keep my countenance as this was said. + +"Never heard of her," observed Mr Laffan with imperturbable coolness. +"How did it happen?" + +"Suddenly, as the guards who had her and others in charge were emerging +from a defile, they were set upon by a small party of horsemen who had +remained concealed behind the rocks, and had allowed the larger force to +pass. Most of the escort were cut down, for their bodies were found +strewed on the ground; and the prisoners, including Dona Dolores, were +carried off. Though hotly pursued by the cavalry, who, on hearing the +shots, had returned, the rascals made good their escape." + +I was delighted to hear this, and I had no doubt but that Juan by some +means or other had heard of the capture of Dona Dolores, and had formed +a plan for her rescue. I hoped also that her father had escaped with +her, as he probably would be in her company. It relieved my mind of a +great difficulty; for although I had resolved to attempt her liberation, +I could devise no plan for its accomplishment. I advised Mr Laffan to +ask no further questions, lest the officer might suspect that he had +some object in view. + +We slung up our hammocks as usual in the common room, and the dominie +and I did our best to sleep soundly, knowing that Lion would awake us if +necessary. + +The captain had stowed himself away on a pile of straw and cloaks in the +corner, and just before I closed my eyes I heard him snoring loudly. A +small oil lamp on the table shed an uncertain light through the room, so +that objects could be only dimly distinguished. Our valises, I should +have said, had been left on the ground a short distance from the heads +of our hammocks. + +How long I had been asleep I do not know, but I was awakened by a low +growl from Lion. He did not spring forward, however. Looking up, I +thought I distinguished a figure stealing along the wall. Lion still +growled. The person, if there was one, remained in dark shadow, or else +had passed through some opening, which I did not remember to have +observed. I lay awake for some moments watching, but could see no one. +I tried to make out whether the Spanish captain was still asleep on his +bed, but, at the distance I was from the corner, I could not be certain. +He was not, at all events, snoring, though he might be there. + +Supposing that I must have been mistaken, I once more fell asleep. +Strange to say, the same circumstances again occurred; but this time, +forgetting at the moment that it was supposed I could not speak Spanish, +and suddenly aroused from slumber, I shouted out, "Who goes there? Take +care, whoever you are, else I'll send a bullet through your head." +There was no answer. Lion gave a suppressed bark, in addition to a +growl, and moved forward to where the valises lay, where he couched down +with his fore paws stretched out, and his head resting on them, watching +our property. From this I was convinced that some one had attempted to +steal them, or, at all events, to obtain some of their contents; for we +had carelessly left them both partly open. I was, however, now very +sure that Lion would take care not to allow any one to touch them +without giving us abundant warning. + +This time I remained awake for some minutes, and clearly distinguished a +person creeping round to the captain's bed, on which he threw himself. +It must have been the captain himself. Possibly his object was to +obtain some money, which, supposing me to be a rich Englishman, he had +concluded he should find; or he may have wished to get hold of our +letters to ascertain who we were. He had, during the evening, +frequently cast suspicious glances at my tutor and me, as if he were not +quite certain that the account we gave of ourselves was the true one. + +Overcome by sleep, my eyes once more closed; but I dreamed that I saw +the captain reading our letters at the table, and making notes of their +contents; and that then Lion jumped up and seized him by the throat. +The dominie and I sprang to his rescue, but could not find the letters. +I thought that he addressed us both by name, however, and appeared to +know all about our affairs. + +The captain got up at daybreak, and awoke us by shouting for his +breakfast. During the meal, which he hurried over, he asked Mr Laffan +a number of questions; then suddenly turning to me he said-- + +"How is it that you, who have been some months in the country, cannot +speak Spanish?" + +I looked at Mr Laffan and signed to him to reply. + +"The young milord has no aptitude for learning languages," he observed. +"If you were to go to England, it might be some months before you could +make yourself understood." + +The Spaniard, smiling grimly, said, "That's strange, for I was awakened +during the night by hearing him cry out, in very good Spanish, +threatening to shoot somebody. I recognised his voice, and could not be +mistaken." + +I endeavoured to look perfectly unconcerned, as if I had not understood +what was said. + +"You must have been dreaming, senor captain," observed Mr Laffan; "I +was nearer to him than you, and did not hear his voice." + +He then, turning to me, asked what the Spaniard could mean. + +"Tell him that the young English lord is indignant at having such +remarks made; that he must apologise for venturing to say such things. +It will be better to carry matters with a high hand." + +The captain again smiled grimly, and muttered, "We shall see, we shall +see." + +Having finished his meal, without even offering to pay the landlady he +left the house and joined his men, who were waiting for him at the door +with the captive silleros and peons. I followed him out unobserved, and +heard him remark "that they must push on as fast as they could go, and +keep ahead of the two English travellers." + +"They are not likely to start for a couple of hours," answered the +sergeant; "and if you wish it, we may find means to stop them." + +Some further conversation ensued, when the captain took out a paper, on +which he wrote several sentences. + +"Give this to Major Alvez, and if he thinks fit he will despatch a party +to arrest them. You may accompany it, as you know them, and so there +will be no mistake." + +Not wishing to be discovered, I returned into the house before I could +hear more. The captain, mounting a strong mule, rode off, followed by +the soldiers and the prisoners. + +As soon as they were gone, the men whom Mr Laffan had hired made their +appearance. The two silleros were remarkably fine, intelligent--looking +Indians, dressed in loose trousers and shirt, the universal poncho of +small dimensions over their shoulders, and a large straw hat. They had +long poles in their hands. The peons wore only hats and loose short +trousers. The machine on which the latter carry the baggage is a sort +of frame of bamboo about three feet long, with a cross-piece at the +lower end, on which they rest the load. It is secured with straps, +which first pass round the burden and then go over the shoulders and +across the breast; another strap passes over the forehead, and is +fastened to the top of the bamboo at the back. The peons are careful to +put a pad between the strap and the head and loins, to prevent chafing. +The chair on which people are carried is much the same as the silla de +cargo, except that the chair has rests for the arms, and a step for the +feet. A peon will carry a load weighing a hundred pounds, but sometimes +double that weight. Although neither Mr Laffan nor I intended to make +use of our silleros unless in case of necessity, we thought it prudent +to take them with us, that we might keep up our character as English +travellers. The sillero who had been engaged to carry me was a +well-informed fellow, as I judged from his remarks to Domingo;--of +course, he did not address me. + +Some time elapsed before the mules were brought to the door. Our horses +were led by halters; and, that they might be as unencumbered as +possible, their saddles and bridles were carried on the backs of peons. +Everything being ready, we started; the porters, with the loads on their +backs, keeping up easily with the mules. The road for about a league of +the way was tolerable, but it then became so bad that we had frequently +to dismount and trudge on foot. So steep were the hills in some places, +that there was no little danger of our animals rolling over. The mules, +however, accustomed to the ground, inspected it narrowly, then, planting +their four legs together, slid down on their haunches. All we could do +was to sit well back in our saddles, and trust to the sure-footedness of +our animals. + +Our first stopping-place was in a ruinous village at the foot of the +mountains--the last we were to see until we reached Ibaque. We occupied +a room in one of the houses, while our attendants formed sheds, and +covered them with large plantain-leaves, which they had brought from +Cartago. From one or two of the very few people we met we learned that +the Spanish captain had gone on ahead, the soldiers we had seen with him +having returned to a fort in the neighbourhood. He must have trusted to +the terror which the Spaniards had inspired by their fearful cruelties. +The Godos had indeed so cowed the natives that they would not have dared +to molest him, else he would scarcely have ventured alone on such a +journey. He, of course, had no luggage or animals to impede his +progress, and would be able to travel faster than we could. As, +however, Mr Laffan and I agreed that he very likely suspected us, we +resolved to push on as rapidly as we could, so that we might, if +possible, reach Bogota before he would have time to warn the authorities +against us. + + + +CHAPTER NINE. + +OUR JOURNEY OVER THE MOUNTAINS--WILD SCENERY--A RIDE ON A SILLERO'S +BACK--FEARS FOR THE SAFETY OF OUR SERVANTS AND HORSES--MAKING PROGRESS-- +MY SILLERO AND I GET AHEAD--THE CRUEL CONDUCT OF THE SPANIARD, AND ITS +FEARFUL PUNISHMENT--OUR CAMP ON THE MOUNTAINS--AN ADVENTURE WITH A +JAGUAR--I KILL A TURKEY FOR SUPPER--OUR ATTENDANTS REJOIN US--SOUNDS AT +NIGHT--WE BEGIN TO DESCEND--DANGERS OF THE JOURNEY--WE PART FROM OUR +SILLEROS, AND PROCEED ON HORSEBACK--A VISIT TO THE FALLS OF TEQUENDAMA-- +THEIR MAGNIFICENCE. + +The road was as bad as could be,--often so steep, that it was like +climbing up steps; in some places, indeed, large trees had fallen across +the path. But our peons skipped over the trunks with as much firmness +as if they had been walking on level ground. Now on one side, now on +the other, were tremendous precipices, down which the traveller, by a +slip of the foot, might be hurled, and dashed to pieces. We had cloaks +and blankets, which we required during the night, for as we ascended the +atmosphere became very cold. We also maintained good fires to keep off +the jaguars, which frequently, we were told, attacked the mules. We +heard them roar during the night; while a dismal howling was kept up by +the red monkeys which abound in these deserts. Added to this, our ears +were saluted by the loud screeching of night-birds, which formed a +serenade far from pleasing. + +The mountains were clothed with gloomy forests, which ascend almost to +the summit of this branch of the Cordilleras. In a few places, where +there were openings, we enjoyed extensive views, on either side, of +superb scenery--the mountain-tops concealed in the clouds. We also saw +numerous birds perched on the trees, or flitting among their branches-- +many of the most brilliant plumage, such as I had never before seen in +the neighbourhood of Popayan. + +I generally kept ahead with my sillero, who led the way. One of the +peons following carried the chief load; then came Mr Laffan; Domingo +and the rest of the people with the animals bringing up the rear. My +sillero, though an Indian, was called Manoel; being, as he said, a +baptised Christian. As I was anxious to gain information, which he +seemed willing to impart, I was tempted to break through the plan which +had been agreed on, and to speak a few words of Spanish, so that I might +ask questions. I began in a broken, hesitating sort of way, until at +length I forgot myself altogether, though Manoel did not appear at all +astonished. + +"El senor speaks Spanish better than I should have supposed possible +from the short time he has been in the country," he observed. + +"I can understand what you say, and that is all I want," I answered. "I +have heard other Indians speak as you do, and so I am more ready to +converse with you than I should be with a Spaniard." + +I felt sure that I could trust Manoel, as, from one or two remarks he +had let drop, I was convinced that he was a Liberal, and had no love for +the Spaniards. While we were encamped at night, sitting round our fire, +we all talked away until it was time to go to sleep; but while +travelling, as we were compelled to move in single file, it was +difficult to carry on a conversation, except with the person immediately +in front or behind. + +After we had proceeded some distance, we began to hope that I had been +mistaken in what I had heard the captain say to the sergeant, and that +we should escape any risk of being captured and prevented from +continuing our journey. Still Mr Laffan continued anxious on the +subject. + +We had been travelling for some time, and I was beginning to feel more +tired than I had hitherto done. I had not as yet, indeed, quite +recovered my full strength, and was scarcely fitted to walk as I was +doing. + +Manoel at length persuaded me to get on the silla. "It makes no +difference to me," he observed; "you are as light as a feather. You +English are very different from the Spaniards. They get on our backs as +if they were riding mules, and will often use a stick if we do not go +fast enough to please them." + +I consented unwillingly, for I did not like the idea of any one carrying +me. + +From the position I had now attained, I could look down the steep ascent +we had mounted, and I had an extensive view. I saw Mr Laffan standing +gazing back along the path we had come; the rest of the party were +nowhere, in sight. We shouted, but no reply came. Could the Spaniards +have acted as the captain had advised them, and captured our people? + +"Stop, Duncan," cried Mr Laffan; "I do not like the look of things." +He soon overtook me, and expressed the same fears I entertained. + +I asked Manoel what he thought. + +"Very likely," he answered; "those ladrones would as willingly rob +English travellers who honour our country by a visit, as they would the +unfortunate Patriots or us poor Indians. The best thing we can do is to +push on." + +The peons carried our valises, the most valuable part of our property. +We had our money in our pockets, with a brace of pistols apiece; and I +had my gun, which I had brought in case I should see anything to shoot. + +"But what shall we do for provisions?" asked Mr Laffan. + +"We shall find game enough on the road to supply all our wants," +answered Manoel. + +We agreed, therefore, to move forward as fast as we could. Domingo, +with the peons and our animals, if not captured, could easily follow and +overtake us at night. + +"We are coming to the steepest part of our journey," said Manoel; "the +Spanish soldiers will have a difficulty in climbing up the path ahead." + +Every now and then Mr Laffan looked back, and I kept looking +occasionally down the valley,--but not a sign of our attendants could I +discover. In a short time Manoel said that he observed the marks of +footsteps ahead. "They are those of a sillero carrying some person. We +shall soon overtake them." + +Manoel, in his eagerness, soon distanced the other peon and Mr Laffan, +whose anxiety made him stop to ascertain whether our attendants were +coming. We were at this time mounting an excessively steep and narrow +path, with a tremendous precipice on one side, down which it made me +giddy to look: had I not had the most perfect confidence in my sillero, +I should infinitely have preferred to walk. I begged him, indeed, to +let me get off; but he always answered, "You are no weight; it makes not +the slightest difference to me. I feel my footing more secure with you +on my back." Shortly afterwards I heard him exclaim, "There they are!-- +the savage brute!" + +"Of whom do you speak?" I asked. + +"Of the Spanish officer. He is digging his spurs into the side of my +poor brother, to make him go faster." + +I glanced round, although it was somewhat difficult to do so; and there, +sure enough, I saw the captain whom we had met at the posada, seated in +a silla, and striking, now with one leg now with the other, at his +carrier, occasionally hitting him over the head with the back of his +hand. The Indian went on, as far as I could perceive, without +complaining; but the captain shouted "Go on--go on faster," and again +dug his spurs into the poor Indian. + +Manoel groaned. I could hear him grind his teeth. + +"How can you bear it?" he muttered. "The Spaniard may repent his +cruelty, though." + +At the foot of the precipice, I should have said, rushed a fierce +torrent, roaring and foaming down the side of the mountain. Presently I +saw the sillero buttress himself, as it were, firmly with the iron-shod +stick with which he supported his steps. Again the Spaniard dug his +spurs into his side, asking him what he was doing, and, with a fearful +oath, shouted to him to go on. The Indian answered by a vigorous jerk +of his back, when I saw the Spaniard shot off, as from a catapult. The +next moment he was falling headlong down into the gulf, several hundred +feet below us. One fearful shriek rent the air; it was the only sound +the wretched man had time to utter before the breath, by the rapidity of +his fall, was taken from his body. It was the work of an instant. I +shut my eyes. It seemed like some terrible dream. The Spanish captain +was gone, though his voice still sounded in my ear. + +Manoel stopped. "He has met the fate he deserved," he said. + +"But the sillero will see you, and suppose you will inform against him." + +Manoel answered with a low laugh. "He is my brother, and knows that the +secret is safe in my keeping. Can I trust you? No other creature saw +what has occurred." + +"God saw him, and he is the avenger of blood," I answered. + +"Would you have had my brother patiently submit to the cruelties +inflicted upon him?" asked Manoel. + +"We have no right to take the life of a fellow-creature, except in +self-defence or open warfare," I replied. "But the secret is safe in my +keeping. I did not even see the face of the man who committed the deed, +and I know not who he was. I love the Spaniards as little as you do, +and I promise you I will not reveal the dreadful crime I have just +witnessed." + +"I am grateful," answered Manoel; "for, to tell you the truth, had I +thought you capable of informing against my brother, I might have been +tempted, though much against my inclination, to serve you as he served +the Spaniard; but had I done so, I never should have been happy +afterwards." + +I scarcely thought that Manoel was in earnest, and yet I believe that he +was so. His fidelity to his brother sillero would have been paramount +to every other consideration. Manoel was advancing as he spoke, but +when I looked round the sillero had disappeared, though I afterwards +caught a glimpse of him bounding up the rocks on the left, having hurled +his chair over the cliff. + +It was some time before I could recover from the horrible scene I had +witnessed; and I debated in my own mind whether or not I should have +given the promise I had made to Manoel. One thing was certain, +however--I was bound to keep it. + +When the path became less steep, I insisted on walking. Manoel, too, +though he had boasted of his strength, was obliged to stop and rest; and +at length the peons and Mr Laffan rejoined us. The latter was still +anxious about the rest of the party, and declared that it would be +impossible for the horses to mount the steep path by which we had come. +He thought that even the mules could scarcely do it, supposing that they +had not been overtaken by the Spaniards. + +I had not, of course, told him how our chief cause of anxiety was +removed, and that we need no longer fear discovery on our arrival at +Bogota. + +"When the Spaniards are driven away, and a Liberal government is +established, we must have a good road over these mountains," exclaimed +Mr Laffan. "It is a disgrace to a civilised country, that no better +means of communication exists between the capital and her most fertile +districts." + +At last, as evening approached, Manoel selected a spot for encamping, +and we made the usual preparations. We enjoyed a magnificent scene. As +far as the eye could range were mountains clothed with immense forests, +into which man had never penetrated. About a couple of hundred feet +below us ran a sparkling stream, towards which, while the peon was +employed in collecting wood for the fire, Manoel made his way, to fill a +leathern bottle with water. I accompanied him with my gun, followed by +Lion, hoping to shoot some birds for supper. + +We had gone a little way along the bank, when a wild turkey got up. I +fired, and brought it to the ground. Manoel ran forward to secure it, +but just before he reached it he stopped and beckoned to me. As he did +so I saw a huge jaguar, which had been drinking at the stream, not two +hundred yards from us. I had, as a sportsman should, reloaded my gun +before moving. The only weapon Manoel possessed, besides the manchette +at his girdle, was his sharp-pointed staff,--not calculated for an +encounter with so powerful a beast. The jaguar, having seen the turkey +fall, crept on to seize it. I advanced as rapidly as I dared, keeping +my gun ready for instant use. Lion would have rushed forward to get the +bird had I not ordered him to remain at my heels, for, powerful as he +was, a blow from the jaguar's paw would have been too much for him. + +The jaguar seemed determined not to be disappointed of the turkey, and +would probably, I thought, spring at Manoel. The difficulty was to +avoid wounding him in shooting at the jaguar. Manoel stood ready for +action, with his staff in his hand. He dared not for a moment withdraw +his eye from the jaguar, which, had he done so, would immediately have +sprung upon him. I called to him, telling him I was coming, in case he +might not have heard my footsteps. The jaguar was all the time creeping +up, threatening at any moment to spring, and I was about twelve yards +behind Manoel when the brute began to bound forward. Manoel leapt on +one side. Now or never, I must gain the victory, or both my companion +and I might lose our lives. I fired. The jaguar bounded into the air, +then fell over on its side. + +Manoel dashed forward and plunged his stick into the creature's neck, +pinning it to the ground; then drawing his manchette, he quickly +terminated its existence. We left it where it lay, for we could not +have carried its skin, even had we taken the trouble of flaying it. + +Near the top of the hill we met Mr Laffan, who had witnessed the +encounter. + +"Bravo, Duncan! you behaved famously; and Manoel too--he is a fine +fellow. All the same, the turkey is welcome, for I am terribly hard +set." + +We soon had the bird roasting before the fire. It was, however, but a +moderate supper for four people and a dog, and I was sorry that I had +not succeeded in killing another turkey. + +Mr Laffan kept constantly jumping up and looking down the path by which +we had come, in the hope of seeing our attendants; and just as the +shades of evening were creeping over the mountains, he exclaimed, "There +they are!--I hope I am not mistaken." + +I could see several persons and animals winding round the side of the +hill, so I called to Manoel, and asked him if he thought they were our +friends. + +"If they are Spaniards, senor, we shall be wise to move forward, for +they will treat you with but little ceremony, I suspect." + +Manoel descended to a point from whence he could observe the approaching +party without being seen, and in a short time returned and relieved our +anxiety by assuring us that they were our friends. It was some time, +however, before they reached our camp. + +They had been delayed by their efforts to rescue one of the mules which +had slipped over a precipice and got pitched in a tree; from which, +wonderful to relate, it was drawn up uninjured. The Spanish commandant, +we therefore concluded, had not thought fit to send in chase of us. + +During the night we heard the roar of jaguars and other wild animals; +but as we kept up a blazing fire, we were not molested. In the morning, +just as we were about to start, I shot two wild turkeys; and had we had +time to spare, I might have killed several more. As we proceeded we saw +several tracks of bears and jaguars, perfectly fresh. + +The next day we reached the Paramo, on the summit of the Cordilleras, +thirteen thousand feet above the level of the sea. We caught sight of +numbers of wild asses, which inhabit this mountainous region. The hoof +of the animal is divided like that of a pig. They are very shy, so that +even the Indians are seldom able to approach near enough to kill them; +and they are also very swift of foot. + +We crossed the Paramo in safety, and continued our journey for several +days without any further adventure. + +The views, as we descended the mountains, were magnificent. We could +see the Cordilleras on the opposite side of the plain of Bogota, seventy +or eighty miles off; while north and south rose prodigious heights, with +apparently perpendicular sides, their bases covered with thick, gloomy +forests, which appeared perfectly impenetrable. As we looked back, it +seemed impossible that we should have crossed the range. Frequently we +passed through dark gorges piercing the forests, two miles in length, +and not more than three or four feet wide, the vegetation on either side +being most luxuriant. + +We had to be on our guard against bruising our legs by pieces of rock; +or getting our clothes torn by the long thorns of the bamboos; or being +knocked off our mules--for we had again mounted--by the branches of +trees. We met a party of peons conveying salt on the backs of oxen to +Cartage. The cargoes were small, and placed in such a manner as to +enable the animals to pass through these narrow places. Fortunately +there was an opening near the spot, or we should have been unable to +pass each other. + +At last we reached a tambo, or shed, built for the use of travellers-- +the first sign of civilisation we had met since we left the western side +of the Cordilleras. + +We were now once more in a warmer region. Butterflies of large size, +covered with orange-coloured spots, fluttered about; and red monkeys +leapt from tree to tree, frequently coming down to make grimaces at us. +Another day's journey brought us to a cottage inhabited by peasants, who +gave us a satisfactory welcome. + +At length we reached the place where we were to part from our silleros +and peons, and continue our journey on horseback. + +"I hope that we shall meet again," I said to Manoel, who had won my +regard. + +"We shall, senor, it may be, if you do not soon leave the country," +replied Manoel, looking earnestly at me. + +"I may stay longer than I at first intended," I said. + +Manoel and the rest of our attendants were well satisfied with the +payment we had made them. + +Mr Laffan and I, with Domingo, now continued our journey on horseback, +the roads being tolerable. But, eager as we were to reach Bogota, we +agreed that it would be wise, the better to keep up our assumed +character, to visit the waterfall of Tequendama, which was not far out +of our direct road. It is formed by the river Bogota, which is +hereabouts sixty yards in breadth. + +As soon as we got within a mile or so of it, we obtained a guide to show +us the way. At a height of six hundred feet above the plain of Bogota, +we enjoyed a magnificent view, embracing the various windings of the +river, several large lakes, and enormous forests--the city in the +distance, backed by a range of bold mountains. Thence we began to +descend towards the waterfall, the sides of the hill being abrupt and +slippery. We passed through a grand, gloomy forest, the lofty boughs of +the trees sheltering us from the rays of the hot sun. All was silent, +except the deep, fine note of the tropiole, which was occasionally +heard; while through the openings we caught sight of other birds of +brilliant plumage, which here live unmolested. + +Leaving our horses, the dominie and I descended a couple of hundred feet +to a spot where the "Salto," as it is called, burst on our view, rushing +down between two mountains until it attains the edge of a precipice, +whence the vast body of water is precipitated into a mighty abyss below. +The chasms through which such falls issue are known in the country as +barancas. The sides, consisting of reddish granite, rise almost +perpendicularly. The height of the whole fall may be nearly one +thousand feet, but the single fall in front of us was calculated to be +about six hundred feet. + +We stood on the bank of the precipice for some minutes, not daring to +speak: indeed, the sound of the falling water completely drowned our +voices when we made the attempt; the sensation in our ears being as if a +thousand pieces of artillery were discharged close to us. The ground +trembled beneath our feet, our eyes were dazzled by the sparkling spray, +and our senses felt confused, as the mighty volume of water rushed down +before us, between the perpendicular rocks, into the chasm at their +base. The overwhelming body of water, as it left its upper bed, formed +a broad arch, smooth and glossy. A little lower down it assumed a +fleecy form; and then shot forth in millions of tubular shapes, which +chased each other more like sky-rockets than anything else to which I +can compare them. The changes were as singularly beautiful as they were +varied, in consequence of the difference in gravitation, and rapid +evaporation, which was taking place before the waters reached the +bottom. Dense clouds of vapour rose for a considerable height, mingling +with the atmosphere, and presenting in their descent the most brilliant +rainbows. From the rocky sides of the immense basin hung shrubs and +bushes, while numerous springs and tributary streams added their mite to +the grand effect. The water at the bottom then rushed impetuously along +a stony bed, over which hung various trees, and was lost beyond a dark +turn in the rock. From the level of the river where we stood, the +hills, completely covered with wood, rose to a great height; while +through the only opening amid them we observed the distant mountains in +the province of Antioquia, their summits clothed with perpetual snow. +Hovering over the fearful chasm were various birds of the most beautiful +plumage, peculiar to the spot, and differing from any I had seen before. +Our guide told us that some philosophical gentlemen, in order to +ascertain the tremendous force of the torrent, had once compelled an +unfortunate bullock to descend it; but that, excepting a few bones, not +a vestige of the animal could afterwards be found at the bottom. + +"It is worth coming all the way from England to behold such a scene as +this," observed Mr Laffan to our guide, as he put a piece of money into +the man's hand. "The young milord is highly pleased." + +The guide took care to inform some persons whom he found at the top of +the hill, and who were going to Bogota, of the opinion I had formed; and +they of course entertained no suspicion that I was any other than a +young English lord travelling with his tutor. This was a great +advantage to us, as it prevented puzzling questions being asked. + +Mr Laffan, however, continued to express his fears that the Spanish +captain might have preceded us, and given notice to the authorities of +our coming. + +I, of course, said nothing of having witnessed the man's terrible end, +as I had resolved to keep the fearful secret locked in my own bosom. +Probably, even had I mentioned it, very little trouble would have been +taken to search out the culprit and bring him to justice. + + + +CHAPTER TEN. + +WE OVERTAKE AN ESCORT WITH PRISONERS ON THE ROAD TO BOGOTA--DR. CAZALLA +AMONG THEM--HE MAKES NO SIGN OF RECOGNITION--WE NEXT SEE UNCLE RICHARD-- +HOW LION NEARLY BETRAYED US--WE SPEAK TO UNCLE RICHARD IN ENGLISH-- +ANTONIO AMONG THE GUARD--HAS HE TURNED TRAITOR?--HURRYING ON BEFORE THE +ESCORT, WE FALL IN WITH A BODY OF VOLUNTEERS FOR THE SPANISH ARMY--AT A +POSADA--COCK-FIGHTING--THE SERGEANT AND HIS RECRUITS ARRIVE--ENTERING +BOGOTA--DESCRIPTION OF THE CITY--THE GREAT SQUARE--AT THE HOUSE OF DON +JOSE--THE CHILDREN'S REMARKS--WE ARE KINDLY TREATED--THE DEATH OF DONA +PAULA SALABARIATA--DON JOSE'S SYMPATHY--SOME OTHER PATRIOTS SHOT. + +Having made a circuit to the southward, we reached the highroad which +runs between the capital and La Plata. As we did so, we saw before us a +considerable body of men both on foot and horseback; and on inquiring of +some peons who were coming in our direction, they told us that they were +soldiers escorting a number of Republican prisoners to Bogota. Could +any of our friends be among them? + +Mr Laffan and I determined to ride up and ascertain; and by assuming a +bold front, we hoped to escape detection. + +We soon overtook the party, but found it impossible to pass them on the +road; and although we saw some prisoners in their midst, we could not +find out who they were. The escort, however, at length halted in the +plaza of a village, which, being of considerable width, enabled us to +ride past them. Pretending not to be much concerned, yet eagerly +scanning the countenances of the prisoners, I saw several whom I knew, +but among them my uncle, Doctor Cazalla, who, with the rest, had been +compelled to walk, his hands secured behind his back with a rope. He +was now, with his companions in misfortune, seated on a log of wood. I +felt sure that he knew me, though he made no sign of recognition, and I +dared not make any to him; but my appearance showed him, I trusted, that +every effort would be made for his liberation. Further on was another +group of prisoners, some lying on the ground, others seated on a stone +bench. Fearing that the account the Spanish captain had given might not +be true, I half expected to see Dona Dolores and her father. The +Spaniards, of course, would not have treated her with more consideration +than they did their other prisoners; but I could see neither her nor +Senor Monteverde. + +At that instant Lion rushed forward towards one of the people seated on +the bench, and what was my dismay to discover Uncle Richard! Fearful +lest the dog should betray us, I loudly called him back, pretending that +I thought he was about to fly at the prisoners. Though always obedient, +on this occasion he did not seem to heed me, until Uncle Richard spoke +to him in a stern voice, when the sagacious animal returned to my side +and remained there, as if he had never before seen Uncle Richard. He, I +saw, immediately recognised Mr Laffan and me, by the glance he cast at +us; but retaining his presence of mind, he made no sign to show that he +had done so. + +I rode close to him, and turning round to Mr Laffan, I said aloud,--"I +wish he would address us as Englishmen, which he might easily do without +causing suspicion; we could then learn all we want to know, and form a +plan for helping him." + +Directly I had said this, Uncle Richard shouted out, "I am sure those +are Englishmen! Have pity on me, noble gentlemen; I am your countryman, +made prisoner by the Spaniards, and shall very likely be shot if I am +not rescued." + +He turned to the soldiers standing by, and said in Spanish, "Those are +English travellers--my countrymen. Allow them to speak to me; they are +always generous, and will reward you." + +Without waiting for leave, we turned our horses towards the bench; and +leaning over, I asked Uncle Richard after our families, and how he had +been made prisoner,--trying to assume as unconcerned a tone as possible. + +"They are all safe," he answered. "Your father's black servant--I won't +mention his name--has charge of them, and they are still safe in the +mountains. I was unfortunately tempted to leave our retreat, in the +hope of raising a body of Indians and others to be ready to aid a +projected attack by the Patriots on the Spaniards, when I was surprised +and taken prisoner. It will go hard with me, I fear, as, though I am an +Englishman, Murillo will not stand on ceremony on that account." + +"Do not be cast down. We will try to find out where you are imprisoned, +and will do everything we can to rescue you," I answered. + +"I am sure of that," he said. "By what wonderful chance are you here?" + +I then told him the object of our journey, and how I had letters to a +number of persons of influence in Bogota, so that I might hope to be of +effectual service to him. + +"You will do your best, I am sure," he said; "and, depend upon it, I do +not intend to be killed like a rat in a hole, but shall try to gnaw my +way out. You had better not stay much longer, or some of those fellows +may possibly recognise you. Bestow a gold piece or two on me, if you +have any to spare; in truth, I am greatly in need of money, as every +dollar I had in my pocket was taken from me when I was made prisoner. +And do not forget to bestow your promised gift on our guards--it will +incline them to favour me. Two or three of them seem very good fellows, +and have been attentive to me on the journey." + +"Now," I said, "if you have an opportunity, tell my mother's brother--I +will not mention his name--why I have come to Bogota, and that every +effort will be made for his liberation." + +After a few more words, I took out my purse and put a few gold pieces +into Uncle Richard's hand. I then turned to Mr Laffan, who had been +standing by, occasionally joining in the conversation, and begged him to +distribute some money among the men. As I glanced my eye over them, +what was my surprise to see my servant Antonio in a corporal's uniform, +and apparently in command of the party! I was sure it was he, although +he looked at me in the most unconcerned manner possible, returning only +a military salute as Mr Laffan handed him the money. Could he have +deserted to the enemy? I had considered him a faithful fellow, as he +certainly was a brave one. He must have had some object in joining the +Spaniards; what it was, however, we could not now ascertain. + +Uttering our farewells, we mounted and rode on, followed by Domingo. As +we did so, Lion turned and cast a lingering glance behind; but the stern +look Uncle Richard put on, told him that he must not take any notice of +him. + +It now became more important than ever that we should reach the city +without delay. We had not gone far, when we saw a party of recruits +marching from a large village to the eastward. Mr Laffan, however, +thought that they were prisoners,--which they certainly resembled more +than soldiers, except that each man carried a musket on his shoulder; +for they were all secured together by a long rope, the end of which was +held by a ruffianly-looking fellow on horseback. They were dressed in +broad-brimmed hats, loose trousers, and ponchos over their shoulders; +but the rest of their bodies, legs and feet, were bare. The sergeant +had on a very unmilitary-looking hat of large dimensions, with wide +leggings, and huge spurs. + +"Faith, I wonder the fellows don't turn round and shoot him," observed +Mr Laffan. + +"Probably, to save the risk of that, they are not supplied with +ammunition," I rejoined. "This is the way in which the Spaniards obtain +their recruits. The poor fellows are thus marched off to be +slaughtered; unless they can contrive to run away, which they certainly +will do if they have the opportunity." + +Saluting the sergeant, who only scowled at us in return, we rode on +ahead of the party. We found, on inquiring the distance we should have +to go, that we could not reach Bogota that evening, and accordingly +stopped at a posada three or four leagues from the city. It was a large +straggling building, at which small traders and merchants generally put +up. People of more consequence were accustomed to proceed further, or +stop at the country-houses of their friends. + +As we rode up, we found all the inhabitants and guests assembled in the +yard witnessing a cock-fight, their eager countenances and excited +exclamations showing the interest they took in the brutal pastime. The +birds, armed with steel spurs, flew at each other and fought +desperately. When one was killed or hopelessly wounded, the owner tore +his hair and swore fearfully at his misfortune--by which, probably, he +had lost no inconsiderable sum. + +We turned away disgusted and entered the inn--Domingo having taken our +horses into the stable--but it was some time before we could get anybody +to attend to us. At last the landlord appeared; and Mr Laffan having +explained who we were, or rather who we pretended to be, begged that we +might have a private apartment. On this the landlord laughed, and said +that even for an English milord this was impossible, but that we might +have a corner of the public room for ourselves. He then inquired what +we would have for supper, assuring us that anything we might ask for +would be provided. As usual, when Mr Laffan mentioned one thing after +another, it was not to be had. At length, however, a tough fowl, with +some salt beef and fried eggs, was placed before us, together with some +plantains and various fruits, off which we contrived to make a very +satisfactory repast. The scene at night reminded me of that at the +posada on the opposite side of the mountains, the arrangements being +very similar. On this occasion, the greater part of the floor was +covered by recumbent figures. + +We had already turned into our hammocks, when a loud voice demanding +admittance was heard outside the house; and--by the light of the only +candle left burning--on the door being opened I recognised the sergeant +and his recruits. This individual in an authoritative tone ordered +several of the sleeping people to get up, in order to make room for his +party. He then called for supper, while his men lay down, with their +muskets by their sides, to rest their weary limbs. Having quickly +finished his meal, he took possession of a vacant space; placing, I +observed, his pistols under the saddle which served him as a pillow, and +unsheathing his sword, so as to have it ready for instant use. He had +probably no great confidence in his recruits, and thought it not +unlikely that one of them might get up during the night and plunge a +cuchillo in his heart. + +On awaking next morning, I proposed starting immediately. + +"Take my advice, and stow away breakfast first," observed Mr Laffan. +"It is a sound rule to follow when travelling, unless one knows that a +substantial meal is waiting one at the end of the stage." + +We got off at an early hour, however, and again passed the sergeant and +his so-called recruits on the road. We pushed on before them, wishing +to get into Bogota as soon as possible. As we rode on, the towers and +steeples of the city appeared before us, glittering in the rays of the +rising sun. On one side was a range of lofty mountains, running in a +semicircular form; the city itself covering an elevation slightly above +the vast plain extending before it. Here and there we caught sight of +the river Bogota, which runs through the plain in a serpentine form at +about three leagues from the city. The surrounding country was +generally uncultivated, except in the immediate neighbourhood of +villages or quintas, though there were large enclosures for grazing +cattle. On the summits of the mountains which rise immediately above +the city were perched two white buildings, which we ascertained to be +convents. We could see the domes and towers of others, and were told +that thirty-three of them occupied the best sites in the city. They +were, indeed, the only fine-looking buildings to be seen. + +I was much struck with the appearance of the town as we entered it. All +the streets appeared to be built at right angles, while a stream of +water flowed through the centre. We passed, also, a number of handsome +public fountains. The streets through which we rode were much crowded, +making us suppose that something unusual was taking place. The +handsomest street we saw was the Calle Real, or Royal Street. The +ground-floors of the houses were occupied by shops; with a story above, +and a large wooden balcony painted green. On either side of the street, +which was well paved, was a foot-path; and as there were no vehicles of +any description, the traffic being carried on by mules, it was free from +ruts, and remarkably clean. + +No one seemed especially to regard us, though we were occasionally +favoured with a stare from persons who fancied they were looking at +Englishmen--some of them scowling ominously at us, and bestowing curses +on our heads for being heretics. Beggars of all descriptions swarmed in +the streets, exhibiting their sores, and demanding rather than +soliciting alms. Many were afflicted with that dreadful complaint known +as elephantiasis--their legs being swollen to an enormous size. Still +more numerous were the galenachas, or black vultures. As we reached the +great square of the city, into which the Calle Real led us, we saw them +hopping about, acting as scavengers, engaged in devouring the filth and +offal left on the ground; and so tame were they, that they would +scarcely get out of our way. + +On riding forward, we found ourselves in the midst of a large market +being carried on in the great square. It was filled with people vending +their provisions--some sitting before pyramids of fruit piled up on the +ground; others at low stools, on which articles of all sorts were +exposed for sale. Among them were Creoles, Blacks, Sambos, Indians-- +indeed, every hue was represented--all jabbering in loud voices. On one +side of the square was the town-house, and on the other the cathedral, +with two convents, and other public buildings. + +We inquired our way to the house of Don Jose Lagano, which we found +looked into the great square. Though a noted Royalist, he was a friend +of both my father and Don Cassiodoro, who were satisfied that he could +be thoroughly trusted, even although he might suspect who we were. + +Don Jose was at home; and on hearing from the servant that a young +English milord had arrived, he politely came out to receive us. As he +read the letter I delivered him it struck me that his countenance +changed. + +"You are welcome, at all events," he said; "and I will endeavour to +forward the object you have in view." + +He introduced me to his wife in the character I had assumed, and Mr +Laffan as my tutor. Soon afterwards, several nice boys and girls of +various ages entered the room. While refreshments were preparing, I +endeavoured to amuse the children by playing with them. Though I spoke +a word or two of ill-pronounced Spanish--not being supposed to +understand their language--they were very free in their remarks, and I +could scarcely refrain from laughing as I heard what they said. The +lady spoke French; and as I knew the language pretty well, we could +converse without difficulty. She somewhat puzzled me by the questions +she put about England; but, as I found she had not been there, I gave +her the best account I could of such places as I had heard my father and +Uncle Richard describe. + +Don Jose's countenance wore a puzzled expression as he heard me talking, +but I believe he from the first suspected who I was. I found him an +amiable, good-natured man, and really anxious to save the lives of such +prisoners as fell into the hands of the Spanish general. + +I had been directed to plead for Dr Cazalla on account of his +scientific attainments, and as it would be a disgrace, whatever his +political opinions were, to put such a man to death. + +Don Jose shook his head when he heard what I said. "That is the very +reason why Murillo will desire to destroy him," he observed. "His +intention is to rid the country of all men of superior intelligence and +influence; and he has especially vowed to put to death every lawyer who +falls into his hands." + +As a last resource, I had letters from Don Cassiodoro to Murillo +himself, which I was to deliver in person--bearding the lion in his +den--with my tutor to act as interpreter. It was considered that there +would be no danger in this--that the doing so would rather tend to +confirm him in the idea that I was a young English nobleman; and I +should, on leaving the city, be able to proceed in any direction I might +think fit. My only fear was lest Mr Laffan and I might encounter some +person who had known us at Popayan, in which case we should be placed in +a very dangerous position. + +Next morning the sound of muffled drums was heard, and on going to the +window with our host I saw a body of troops marching from the direction +of the prison. In their midst walked several persons, each between two +priests. I was struck by the appearance of one of the unhappy persons-- +who were evidently prisoners--a young lady of graceful figure and +features, who appeared to me singularly beautiful. + +"Who are they, and where are they going?" I asked of Don Jose in +French, for he spoke that language as well as his wife. + +"That lady is Dona Paula Salabariata; and she is going to her death." + +"To her death!" I exclaimed. + +"Yes; in a few minutes she and those with her are to be shot. She is a +determined Revolutionist, and has long been engaged in inciting the +people to rebellion. Her correspondence with the Republicans has at +length been discovered; and at her trial, which took place yesterday, +she acknowledged her principles, and confessed that she had written the +letters." + +"So young, and so beautiful!" I exclaimed. + +"Yes, my friend; and she is gentle, and possesses a woman's heart, +though with the spirit of a man. She was engaged to marry a young +Republican officer; but neither her youth nor her beauty will avail her +with our stern viceroy." + +"The cruel tyrant!" I exclaimed. + +Not noticing what I said, he continued: "Do you think that anything will +induce him to spare the learned doctor?"--and here he fixed his eyes on +me--"or any young man who falls into his power?" + +I could make no reply; indeed, our attention was absorbed by the +mournful procession passing through the square. My eyes were fixed on +Dona Paula. + +"My heart will burst, if I do not go out and fight for her!" exclaimed +my tutor, who was standing close behind me; and he clapped his hand to +his sword. + +"My friend," said Don Jose, "be calm. Although I do not hold her +principles, I would join you if it would avail, but any attempt of the +sort would only result in our certain death." + +My heart was swelling with indignation, and I felt as did my worthy +tutor, but I saw the folly of acting as our feelings prompted. + +The rest of the prisoners walked with firm step; but I confess that I +scarcely noticed any of them, nor, I believe, did my companions, our +whole attention being absorbed by the lovely girl who formed the +prominent figure. I remarked that she was dressed in black, and that +she advanced with a firm step, her small head erect on her graceful +neck; the only ornament she wore in her glossy black hair being a spray +of orange-blossom, as if she were going to her bridal. She carried a +book in her hand; and when the friar presented the crucifix to her, she +gently but firmly put it aside. + +The party moved forward until they reached the centre of the vast +square, when they halted in line, the other prisoners being made to +stand on either side. The lady knelt down, and was allowed to remain +for a few minutes in prayer; she then rose, and handing the wreath and +her shawl to some of her weeping female friends who had followed her, +she stood alone, holding a handkerchief in her hand. Then exclaiming, +"Success to the cause of my oppressed countrymen!" she let the +handkerchief drop. At that moment the firing-party, a few paces off, +discharged the fatal volley; and as the smoke cleared off we saw her +stretched on the ground, not a movement to indicate that she lived being +perceptible. An officer advanced and took her hand, to ascertain that +she was dead, after which her attendants approached and bore her away; +the only favour which the savage tyrant had been induced to grant being +that her friends should be permitted to commit her body to the grave. + +Such would have been the fate of Dona Dolores, had she not escaped, I +thought. I was nearly expressing my opinion aloud, when I happily +remembered in whose company I was. The two ladies, I had no doubt, had +frequently communicated with each other; and since such women, full of +intelligence and enthusiasm, were labouring in the cause, it must, I +felt sure, in the end be successful. Would that all the men were like +them, so disinterested, so self-sacrificing, so devoted,--ready, like +Dona Paula, to lay down their lives for their country's good! But, +alas! too many even among the Patriots were self-opinionated--seeking +their own aggrandisement, and how to fill their coffers, without regard +to the public weal; yet among them were many true Patriots, such as +Bolivar, Paez, Arismendez, Santandar, and many others. + +The rest of the prisoners were now brought forward; but Don Jose and +myself, shuddering, retired from the window, unwilling to see our +fellow-creatures slaughtered, while we were without the power to help +them. The dominie, however, kept his post; but I saw that he was +grinding his teeth and clutching the hilt of his sword, while his bosom +heaved, and expressions escaped his lips, which, although I could not +even catch the words, showed how deeply he was agitated. + +"Sad, very sad, that such things should be," observed Don Jose; "but the +general believes that the only way of overthrowing the Republican +principles which have gained ground in the country, is to exterminate +all who hold them." + +"Does he remember the tale of `the dragon's teeth'?" I asked. "The +blood of that young girl cries for vengeance, and I feel assured that +thousands will rise up to answer the call." + +"What! do you Englishmen side with the Liberals?" he asked. + +"My countrymen are ever ready to espouse the cause of the oppressed and +suffering; and such, Don Jose, you must acknowledge the inhabitants of +this country have long been," I answered boldly, for I was sure that my +worthy host would not be offended. Indeed, I suspect that he himself +leaned towards the independent side, although a professed Royalist. + +"Time will show," he remarked; "but I wish that all this bloodshed could +be avoided." + +I remarked that every time a volley was fired he shuddered. + + + +CHAPTER ELEVEN. + +AN INTERVIEW WITH MURILLO--WE GAIN NOTHING FOR OUR PAINS--I STILL +ENDEAVOUR TO RESCUE THE PRISONERS--MEET ANTONIO, WHO BELONGS TO THE +GUARD AT THE PRISON--MY CONVERSATION WITH HIM--HE PROMISES ASSISTANCE, +BUT GIVES ME BAD NEWS--OUR PLAN ARRANGED--DON JOSE SUSPECTS US, AND +REQUESTS US TO LEAVE HIS HOUSE--WE REMAIN TILL THE FOLLOWING DAY--DR. +CAZALLA AND SENOR MONTEVERDE, WITH MANY OTHERS, SHOT--DOMINGO BRINGS ME +A DISGUISE, AND ADVISES ME TO ESCAPE WITHOUT DELAY--DON JOSE REQUESTS ME +NOT TO SEE HIM AGAIN--MR. LAFFAN AND I SEPARATE--HE STARTS FOR HONDA; I +GO TOWARDS THE PRISON, FOLLOWED BY LION--OUTSIDE THE PRISON WALLS-- +JOINED BY UNCLE RICHARD--OUR ESCAPE FROM THE CITY--WE REACH THE +MOUNTAINS--OUR ARRIVAL AT A RIVER--NO MEANS OF CROSSING--SPANISH +SOLDIERS IN PURSUIT--A TARABITA OR ROPE-BRIDGE--DANGEROUS CROSSING--THE +BRIDGE CUT--OUR ESCAPE--SOUNDS OF FIRING--WE FIND SHELTER IN THE HUT OF +AN INDIAN, WHOSE SON UNDERTAKES TO GUIDE US. + +By the aid of Don Jose and other friends to whom I had letters, I +ascertained that Dr Cazalla and Mr Duffield had been brought into +Bogota, and were confined, with several other persons whom I knew, in +the chief prison of the city--although they had not yet undergone the +mockery of a trial, which would precede their execution. Don Jose had +made every exertion to obtain their liberation, but in vain. The savage +Murillo, it was said, had resolved to shoot the whole of them. As there +was no English Consul at that time in Bogota, and no one who dared +openly to take Uncle Richard's part, I determined, according to the +advice I had received, to beard the lion in his den, and threaten him +with the vengeance of England should Mr Duffield be injured. I was +also to point out to Murillo the disgrace of destroying a man of such +high scientific attainments as Dr Cazalla, and to plead that he might +be banished to England, where he could render service to the human race. + +Mr Laffan was quite willing to accompany me as interpreter. "We may +bamboozle the scoundrel, and succeed where others have failed," observed +the dominie. "There is nothing like impudence,--or a bold bearing, as +some would call it,--when one has to deal with a fellow of this sort." + +We set out, accordingly, for the viceroy's palace. On our arrival we +found numerous officers hurriedly coming and going, but most of them +merely glanced at us and passed on. In the ante-room there was a motley +assemblage of persons of all ranks. Some had come with petitions, +others had been summoned to undergo examinations; and several-- +informers, I have no doubt--were hoping to obtain a reward for their +treachery. I sent in my card by an aide-de-camp, requesting an +interview with his Excellency. To my surprise, we were almost +immediately admitted. The general was seated at a table covered with +papers--two or three officers standing near him. His countenance did +not belie his character. Although the expression of his mouth was +concealed by his huge moustache, the dark eyes which gleamed forth from +under his shaggy brows, and the frown which wrinkled his high forehead, +betokened his savage disposition. + +"Who are you, and what do you want?" he asked abruptly in Spanish. + +I turned to Mr Laffan and begged him to interpret what the general +said. + +"Tell him that I am English, and how, hearing that a countryman of mine +has been imprisoned unjustly, I have come to demand his release, and +permission for him to accompany me back to England." + +"Of what profession is he?" asked the general of Mr Laffan. "Is he a +lawyer?" + +"No," I replied; "he is a British naval officer who has resided for some +time in this country, but is still under the protection of the English +Government, to whom it would be my duty to give information should any +harm happen to him." + +"Had he been a lawyer, whether a British subject or not, he should be +shot," answered Murillo. "As it is, I will consider the matter." + +He turned to one of the officers, who handed him a paper. + +"Ah! I see he is married to a lady belonging to a rebel family; and he +himself was found inciting the peasantry to take up arms. I care not +though he is under British protection. He shall die." + +"My countrymen will avenge him," I answered through Mr Laffan, who +assumed an authoritative tone and manner, which I thought would produce +some effect. "You know not whether the accusation is true or false." + +Judging that it was best to leave what I had said to produce its effect, +I stopped for a minute, and then continued,--"Well, your Excellency, I +need not speak further about Senor Ricardo Duffield. I have now to +plead for another person, who, although not an Englishman, belongs to +all civilised countries in the world, and all will equally stigmatise +those who injure him; I allude to the learned Dr Cazalla. I beg that +he may be allowed to accompany me to my own country, where he can +prosecute his scientific studies without molestation." + +The general's brow grew darker than ever. + +"He is one of the pests of this country. He taught the rebels how to +make gunpowder and arms, to be used against their rightful sovereign. +He shall die, even although the whole British army, with your Lord +Wellesley at their head, were to endeavour to rescue him." + +"That's an ungrateful remark, your Excellency, considering the service +he has rendered Spain," observed Mr Laffan; "but it's just what may be +expected." + +"Go out of my presence--this instant!" exclaimed the general, irritated +by this imprudent remark. "The prisoners shall die; and let me tell you +that your errand is bootless." + +I felt, indeed, that such was the case. In fact, I heard the general, +turning to the officer who acted as his chief of police, direct him to +keep an eye upon us. His suspicions had, I saw, been aroused. + +We did not consider it necessary to pay any special mark of respect as +we took our leave. The general was talking to the officers at his side, +scarcely deigning to notice us. With heads erect, and as calm +countenances as we could command, we passed through the crowd in the +ante-room, and made our way into the street. We then hurried back to +Don Jose's, to tell him how fruitless had been our visit to the viceroy. + +"I was afraid so," observed our host. "If Murillo has made up his mind, +no power on earth can turn him from his purpose." + +I had not forgotten Antonio, and had formed a plan to try and rescue Mr +Duffield and Dr Cazalla, should other means fail. As Antonio had not +already betrayed me, I had great hopes that I could rely on his +assistance. Always accompanied by Mr Laffan, I went about endeavouring +to discover him. I at length ascertained that he belonged to the guard +stationed at the prison. In all probability, then, he would at times +have charge of the prisoners inside; and if so, he might be able to aid +in their escape. + +Before long we fell in with him off duty, and near the prison itself. +It was late in the evening, but there was sufficient light for us to +recognise each other. I made a sign, and he followed us to a dark spot +under the prison walls. + +"You know me, Antonio?" I asked. + +"Ah yes, senor, the moment I saw you, while we were on the march here. +I joined the Godos as the only means of saving my life--having obtained +the uniform of a corporal who had been killed. My intention, however, +was to desert on the first opportunity." + +"Will you venture to assist the escape of Don Ricardo and Dr Cazalla?" +I asked. + +"Don Ricardo has already spoken to me, and promised a reward. I will do +what I can without the reward, although the money would be welcome. He +has promised me three hundred dollars." + +"And I will give two hundred more when he is safe away from the city, +and five hundred for Dr Cazalla." + +"Ah, senor, that is more difficult, for he is strictly guarded, and, it +is said, is to die to-morrow." + +"To-morrow!" I exclaimed; "then he must escape to-night." + +"Impossible!" answered Antonio; "ten thousand dollars would not effect +his liberation. And besides, in endeavouring to free him I might be +suspected, and thus be unable to help Don Ricardo." + +"I know that I can trust you, Antonio," and I put some gold pieces into +his hand. "Perhaps you can bribe your comrades; and promise them any +further reward you think fit." + +"They would take the money, and betray me," he answered. "I will employ +some of it, however, but it will be in supplying them with abundance of +strong wine; that will give me a better mastery over them than any +bribe. Trust to my discretion." + +After some further conversation, I arranged with Antonio that he was to +try and effect the escape of Uncle Richard, and, if possible, that of +Dr Cazalla. The following night he was to be on guard inside the +prison, and he would then have the keys in his possession. The most +likely time was about ten o'clock; and I arranged to be in the +neighbourhood to assist, if necessary, in the escape of my friend. + +Mr Laffan approved of the plan, but thought that it would be imprudent +for him and me to be seen again near the prison, although we might +afterwards join the fugitives. I proposed, therefore, having horses in +readiness, and making our way down to Honda, whence we might embark on +the river Magdalena; and the current being rapid, we should not occupy +more than five days, and might at Carthagena get on board the first +vessel about to sail. If we could once reach any of the British West +India Islands, we should be safe. + +On our return Don Jose met us as we entered, with an expression of +anxiety on his countenance. + +"I fear, my friends, you are not exactly what you represent yourselves +to be," he said. "You are honest, I doubt not, and well-conducted, and +I wish to fulfil my engagement as far as I can to assist you; but I must +advise you to leave this house and the city as soon as possible, or I +shall be compromised by your remaining." + +"I am deeply grateful for all your kindness, and will do as you advise," +I answered. "I shall be thankful if I have ever the opportunity of +proving my sincerity." + +We should at once have left Don Jose, but that it was too late to seek a +lodging; and as he did not express a wish that we should do so, we +remained, promising to bid him farewell the next morning. I sincerely +hoped that he would not suffer in consequence of his kindness to us. + +We were about to start on the following day, after breakfast, to which +our kind host insisted we should remain, when, on looking from the +window across the square, we saw, as we had on the morning of our +arrival, a body of troops marching from the prison. There was to be +another execution, then. My heart sank within me. Was Murillo about to +carry out his threat? As they approached I could scarcely support +myself, for I saw my uncle, Dr Cazalla, with several other prisoners, +nearing the spot where so many of the Patriots had already yielded up +their lives for the liberty of their country. There were four other +persons. It was certainly some relief not to see Uncle Richard among +them; and my whole attention was now concentrated on Dr Cazalla. I +pointed out the doctor to Don Jose, in the vain hope that something +might even now be done to save him. + +"I know him. He is talented, learned, and noble-minded," said Don Jose. + +"The world will suffer if he dies," I said. + +"I know it, my friend," answered Don Jose; "but his doom is sealed." He +took my arm as he spoke. "I would not have you seen," he continued. +"Be warned by me, and remain concealed until nightfall. Your horses are +in my stable, and your servant is prepared for the journey." + +Even while he was speaking the rattle of musketry was heard, and Mr +Laffan, who had, notwithstanding Don Jose's advice, gone back to the +window, exclaimed, "They have murdered our friend! I hope they will not +treat the other in the same way." + +"Do you speak of my uncle?" I asked in English. + +"Too truly--I do. There he lies, like a clod of earth; and there, too, +will lie many more, in a few minutes. There is another! I did not +notice him at first. Poor Dona Dolores! what will become of her?" + +"What! has Juan been captured?" I exclaimed, my thoughts running back +to my friend, who might, I feared, have fallen into the hands of the +enemy. + +"No, not Juan; but Senor Monteverde.--Yes, I am sure it must be he, +though he is poorly dressed, and walks with a tottering gait. Yes; they +are leading him up to the place of execution." + +Forgetting Don Jose's caution, I sprang forward to the window and caught +a glance--it was but a momentary one--of our poor friend. It was +sufficient, however, to convince me that I was not mistaken. Don Jose +again took me by the arm and led me back; but a moment afterwards a +volley was fired, and an exclamation uttered by Mr Laffan told me that +Senor Monteverde was among those slaughtered by the savages. + +"It will be sad news to carry to my mother and father, and to Dona +Dolores. What will become of her? Her father dead--her property +destroyed; but, probably, she herself is by this time in the hands of +the Spaniards, and may ere long share the fate of Dona Paula. Shall I +ever meet them again?" I murmured. + +Other volleys of musketry, which sounded horrible in our ears, too +plainly told us what was continuing to take place. + +By Don Jose's advice, we kept close in our room during the remainder of +the day; and it was growing dark when Domingo appeared, with a bundle +under his arm. + +"I have been provided with this for you to put on, senor," he said, +producing a serving-man's dress, similar to that which I had worn at +Popayan. It was curious that the same disguise should have been chosen. +"You are suspected of being a Liberal; and whether you are so or not, +you are to be arrested to-night, and probably share the fate of those +who were shot this morning. I am desired to tell you, therefore, that +you must make your escape as soon as it is dark--you taking one +direction, while Senor Miguel and I take another." + +Before I had time to ask further questions, Domingo retired. + +I began to put on the dress he had brought me, and was quickly changed +into a serving-man. While I was thus engaged Mr Laffan came in, and I +told him what Domingo had said. + +"But I cannot desert you, Duncan!" he exclaimed. "I will stick by you, +whatever happens." + +I soon convinced him that we should thus only increase the risk of being +arrested, and advised him at once to make his way to Honda, as we had +told Murillo we intended doing. If not molested, he might thence, +instead of embarking on the Magdalena, travel over the mountains +westward to one of the towns on the Cauca. As he had no proposal to +offer against this plan--indeed, there was no other to be pursued--he +agreed to it. + +"But how will you be able to travel alone?" he asked. + +"I do not intend to travel alone, if I can help it," I answered. "I +believe that Antonio will succeed in liberating Uncle Richard, and that +I shall be able to help him to make good his escape." + +I was unwilling to leave the house without wishing Don Jose and his +family farewell; and as I was thinking how I could best manage to do so, +I discovered a slip of paper pinned on to the front of the jacket, on +which was written in a feigned hand,--"I know your feelings, and what +you would desire to say; but it is safer that we should not again meet. +Farewell. Destroy this when you have read it." + +The paper was not signed, but I guessed it came from Don Jose. + +Domingo having now reappeared, and announced that the horses were ready, +we descended to the courtyard. "It will be safer for me to slip out +first," I observed. + +To this Mr Laffan agreed. + +"You had better take Lion with you," I said; and I ordered my faithful +dog to remain with Mr Laffan. But on this occasion the usually +obedient animal was disobedient. When I had made my way out of the yard +I found him following me, and I had not the heart to send him back. + +I resolved at all risks to join Uncle Richard, should he be able to make +his way out of prison; so towards that gloomy building I at once +directed my steps. As the town was in total darkness, there being no +lamps in the streets, I ran little chance of being detected, while Lion +could not be seen a few paces off. In a short time I reached the spot +where I had had the conversation with Antonio; and there, crouching +down, I awaited the hour he had named. There was but one clock in the +city which struck the hours. The time appeared to go very slowly by. +Perfect silence reigned through the streets. Neither Royalist nor +Republican were at that time inclined to move about in the dark, as +assassins too frequently plied their deadly trade, and several persons +of both parties had been murdered. + +At last ten o'clock struck. I sat with my hand on Lion's head, +listening attentively. The prison door opened; the sentinel challenged, +"Quien vive?" and the countersign was returned. Then the door closed, +and I heard the sound of footsteps approaching, but they did not seem +those of persons attempting flight. My hopes sank. After all, some +officer might have visited the prison, and was now leaving it with a +guard. I was afraid, consequently, to move; but in another instant Lion +rose to his feet, and, though he uttered no sound, bounded forward +towards one of the persons approaching. + +"That must be Uncle Richard," I thought. "The dog knows him." + +I was not mistaken; and I was quickly by his side, when I found that he +had on the cap and cloak of an officer. The other person who followed +close behind him was, I guessed from his uniform, which I could but +indistinctly see, Antonio. + +Uncle Richard divined who I was, and he put out his hand and grasped +mine. I returned the pressure; but we did not venture to speak. + +Antonio led the way to the western side of the city. "We must make for +the mountains immediately; there will be less risk of the Godos looking +for us there," he said, when we had got between some high convent walls, +where no one was likely to overhear us. + +One thing was certain, we must get to a distance from the city before +daybreak. On that point we were all agreed. + +When there was no risk of being seen, we moved as fast as possible; but +as we drew near the guard at the entrance of the city we had to walk at +a dignified pace. Antonio had given the sign and countersign to Uncle +Richard and me, so we passed through without question; it being +supposed, in all likelihood, that the officer was on his way to visit +some outpost attended by an orderly, while I concluded that I was taken +for a guide. + +Long before morning dawned we were well among the mountains. Antonio +had thoughtfully filled his knapsack with provisions, which, in addition +to those I had brought from Don Jose's, would serve us for several days. +The corporal had also furnished himself with a remarkably good rifle, +and a quantity of ammunition. Our intention was to make our way to some +place occupied by a Patriot force, of which we hoped to gain +intelligence from the peasantry, either Creoles or Indians, the greater +portion of whom were likely to prove friendly. It was most important, +however, to put as great a distance as possible between the city and +ourselves, for as soon as our flight was discovered parties would +certainly be sent out to scour the country in search of us. + +We rested for a couple of hours under an overhanging rock--to take some +food and regain our strength--just before daybreak, and then once more +pushed on. None of us, unfortunately, had any exact knowledge of the +country. We had therefore to steer by the sun, and to follow the tracks +which appeared to lead in the direction we wished to go. Occasionally, +when we reached a height from which a view eastward could be obtained, +we looked back to ascertain if any one was following. A party on +horseback, by galloping over the more level ground, instead of climbing +the mountains on foot, might even now overtake us. + +The sun was still shining over the hills to the westward, but would +shortly disappear behind them, when we saw before us a rapid river +rushing between lofty and precipitous cliffs. How to cross it, was the +question. We could see no bridge or canoe, and it ran too furiously for +us to breast its foaming billows; while it would be dangerous to cross +on a raft, even if we could find materials for forming one. + +We made our way over the rough ground down the stream. + +"I should think we must be safe from pursuit here; but I will just take +a look-out from yonder height," observed Uncle Richard. + +He had scarcely got to the summit of the hill when he shouted out, "Here +come some suspicious-looking fellows; but they are a good way astern at +present, so that we must somehow or other leave them on this side of the +river." After taking another look, to assure himself that he was not +mistaken, he rejoined us, and we hurried along the bank. + +We had not gone far when Antonio exclaimed, "I see a tarabita! It will +serve our purpose; and we must take care that it does not help our +enemies across." + +He pointed, as he spoke, towards a long thin rope thrown across from one +cliff to the other. On getting up to it we found the bridge--for so it +might be called--consisted of a long rope made of hides, the ends +secured by stakes driven into the earth; to this a sort of basket was +suspended, with two smaller ropes fastened to it--the one reaching to +the side we were on, the other to the opposite bank, where a man-- +apparently the guardian of the so-called bridge--was seated on a log +smoking. Antonio shouted to attract his attention; and getting up, he +made a sign for one of us to enter. + +"You go first, Senor Ricardo," said Antonio to Uncle Richard. + +But the latter insisted on going last, and made me and Lion get into the +basket. The bridge-keeper immediately began to haul away, and I soon +found myself dangling over a fearful chasm. I was, however, quickly +across; and, by means of a rope passing through a block on the side I +had left, the basket was immediately drawn back. + +Antonio was passed over in the same way, and joined me. + +Uncle Richard had, in the meantime, gone to the height overlooking the +path behind us, but he soon hurried back and took his seat in the +basket. + +"Tell the old Indian to be smart in hauling me across," he shouted out. + +The man obeyed; but Uncle Richard was not more than half-way over when +we saw a party of soldiers on the height above the river, and I clearly +made out that they were Spanish soldiers. Should they reach the end of +the rope before Uncle Richard was safe, they might, by threatening to +cut it, compel us all to come back; so we hastened to seize hold of the +tackle, in order to assist the Indian in dragging the basket over more +quickly. + +"Take care, senores; you will break it, if you pull too hard," he +observed. + +We were not aware whether he had seen the Spaniards coming. + +"Haul away," shouted Uncle Richard. + +We obeyed him, and he was soon able to spring on to the ground. His +first action on doing so was to grasp Antonio's sword, and to hack away +at the rope, to the great astonishment of the old Indian, who loudly +expostulated, and attempted to stop him. But Antonio and I seized the +bridge-keeper and held him fast while Uncle Richard finished the +operation, and soon the rope swung across to the opposite cliff. + +"Now," said Uncle Richard, "we shall have to make the best use of our +legs, or we may chance to have some bullets whistling about our ears." + +We hurried on, hoping to get beyond the range of the firearms of our +enemies before they had reached the bank; and we had completely lost +sight of them when we heard a volley fired. We only hoped that the poor +old Indian had hidden himself in time, and that it was not aimed at him. +Whether there was any ford, or other means of crossing the river, +further down, we could not tell; it was therefore important to make as +rapid progress as possible. A moon was in the sky, about half full, +which, in that atmosphere, allowed us to see our way for some distance, +so we took great care to profit by it. + +At length we saw a light ahead of us. It proceeded from an Indian's +hut, in the centre of which a large fire was blazing. We made our way +towards it, hoping to obtain a guide; besides, we required rest, and it +was necessary to obtain it at all risks. + +The owner of the hut was seated before the fire boiling a pot of cocoa, +and he did not appear to be surprised on seeing us. + +"Travellers are constantly coming this way, and I was getting some cocoa +ready lest any should come in," he observed. + +Uncle Richard said that we should be glad to rest for a few hours, and +inquired whether he would guide us over the mountains. + +"I cannot do so myself; but my son, who will be here shortly, will +willingly do so. He has guided many travellers across the Paramo," was +the answer. + +We took our seats around the fire, and the Indian cooked some plantains, +which, with the cocoa, served us for supper. + +In a short time the son of whom our host had spoken made his appearance. +He was a fine, strong youth, and seemed well fitted for acting in the +capacity of guide. + +He told us that as he was coming over the mountains from a village on +this side of the river, to which he had escorted some travellers, he had +heard firing, and concluded that there had been a fight between some +Liberals and the Godos. "I hope the last were well beaten," he +muttered, looking at Uncle Richard's military cap. + +"So do I," I observed. "You do not take us for Godos?" + +"I judge of people by their conduct, and as yet I have had no +opportunity of learning how you behave," answered the young Indian, with +a laugh. + +"He is the right sort of fellow," observed Uncle Richard; "we may trust +him." + +I asked him if he had any food for my dog; and going out, he at once +returned with some pieces of flesh, off which, although somewhat +odorous, Lion made a substantial supper. + +"It is the remains of a bear we killed some days ago," observed the +young Indian. + +We all lay down round the fire,--Lion sleeping between Uncle Richard and +me, and both of us feeling assured that he would give us timely notice +should any danger be at hand. + + + +CHAPTER TWELVE. + +OUR JOURNEY CONTINUED--BEAUTIFUL SCENERY--PREPARING TO CROSS THE +PARAMO--DESCRIPTION OF A PARAMO--COMMENCE THE PASSAGE--SKELETONS OF MEN +AND MULES--INTENSITY OF THE COLD--ANTONIO SUFFERS GREATLY--HE RECOVERS +BY DRINKING A DRAUGHT OF COLD WATER--DARKNESS--OUR SUFFERINGS ON THE +INCREASE--A STRONG INCLINATION TO SLEEP--I SINK TO THE GROUND--LION +AROUSES ME--WE REACH THE TAMBO--A NIGHT IN THE HUT--INTENSE COLD-- +DAYLIGHT AT LAST--OUR PASSAGE ACROSS THE PARAMO--SAD SIGHTS--THE DESCENT +OF THE MOUNTAINS--REACHING A FOREST--PADILLO GOES OFF TO OBTAIN +INTELLIGENCE--WE BUILD A HUT, AND GO TO SLEEP--OUR HUT ON FIRE--A NARROW +ESCAPE. + +For several days we had been travelling westward over the mountains. +The young Indian, Padillo, as he called himself, had proved a faithful +guide. If we were pursued, we had evaded our enemies, and, we hoped, +had done so effectually. The scenery through which we passed was +extremely wild and grand. Round us appeared mountains piled on +mountains, rocks heaped on rocks; and when we fancied that we had +reached the summit of an elevation whence we could look down below, +another mountain, more grand and terrific, appeared through the veil of +mist which before had shrouded it from our sight. It seemed as if we +should never escape from this chaos of rocky pinnacles and snow-covered +heights. The sky above us was of a clear, bright blue; in some places +beautifully streaked, and varied with a silvery hue or pale straw +colour, but not a cloud dimming its lustre. Severe as was the cold, as +we were in constant exercise we scarcely felt it; while the rarity of +the air imparted wonderful lightness and elasticity to our frames, so +that sometimes I could scarcely help leaping and bounding forward. At +night we generally found shelter in a cave or under an overhanging +rock--always keeping up a blazing fire, to scare wild beasts, as well as +to afford us warmth. + +At last we reached the entrance of a gloomy valley, between lofty and +snow-topped mountains, their sides in some places almost perpendicular. + +"We must be prepared to push rapidly across the Paramo," observed +Padillo. "It is late in the year, and I do not altogether like the look +of the weather. We shall require two days at least to get to the +further end. Frequently three days are occupied by persons on +horseback, but you march so quickly that we may do it in less time; and +there is a tambo about midway where we can obtain shelter." + +"Cross it we must, at all risks," answered Uncle Richard, who was +especially eager to get back to the neighbourhood of Popayan, to +ascertain how his family were faring. He intended also to try and raise +a corps. + +It was not without reason that we dreaded passing across this bleak +region. The name of Paramo is given to those inhospitable +desert-regions high up among the mountains, of which there are so many +in the Andes. No human being can exist in them without keeping in +incessant and violent motion. Artificial means are incapable of +sustaining life while a person is exposed to the inclement air. Ardent +spirits are entirely void of any good effect, and generally increase the +evil consequences. These Paramos are usually long deep valleys between +lofty elevations, so shut in and obscured by the neighbouring hills as +to possess all the severities of their extreme height, while not a ray +of sunshine can enter to shed its gentle influence through them. Death +almost invariably overtakes those who attempt to rest in them +unsheltered at night. The extent of some of them is so great that it +requires two or three days to cross them; and in these small houses have +been erected, in which cooking utensils and other articles of +convenience are kept for the accommodation of travellers, as well as +stabling for their mules. Here, by means of large fires, they may +manage to keep themselves warm, though even then people suffer greatly. + +In consequence of the highly rarefied air, the traveller at first +experiences great difficulty in breathing, accompanied by a sharp, +piercing pain at each inspiration. This increases until he becomes what +the natives call "emparamento,"--when his extremities are benumbed, and +he can no longer continue in motion. Soon after this he is seized with +violent raving and delirium; froth issues from his mouth; he tears the +flesh from his hands and arms with his teeth, pulls his hair, and beats +himself against the ground, meanwhile uttering the most piercing cries, +until he is quite exhausted. The cold then deprives him of all motion +and feeling, his body becomes much swollen, and fearful distortion of +the features is produced by the dreadful convulsions he is suffering, +while the surface of his skin becomes nearly black. The only remedy the +natives know of is to scourge each other, and to drink the cold water +from the springs, which are found here and there in most of the Paramos. + +We had all of us heard this account of the Paramos, and were fully +prepared for the danger we must encounter. Being on foot, we should the +better be able to keep ourselves warm; at the same time, we should be +the longer exposed to the piercing wind. Already, as we mounted towards +this fearful region, we began to experience unpleasant sensations when +breathing. + +Having taken an ample breakfast, we determined to push on to the tambo, +where we must rest until the following morning. It was most important +to reach it before dark, for should we be benighted our position would +become critical in the extreme. Nerving ourselves for the undertaking, +we marched forward. Providentially there was but little wind. As we +advanced we saw the skeletons and carcasses of numerous mules; some +perfectly blanched by the wind, others still partly covered with flesh, +on which numberless galenachas, or black vultures, were busily feasting. +The stench proceeding from others not long dead, close to which we had +to pass, was most offensive. + +"At all events, no human beings appear to have died here," I observed to +our guide. + +"Don't say that, until you have got further," he answered. + +In a few minutes we came in sight of a grinning skull placed on the top +of a rock, the body lying below it. A few steps further on we came upon +the skeletons of several persons lying with their legs across their +mules; both the animal and its rider having evidently succumbed at the +same moment. + +"This does not look pleasant," observed Uncle Richard; "but we must not +allow it to depress our spirits." + +In spite, however, of the severe exertions we were making, we felt the +cold every instant becoming greater. Antonio, though apparently as +strong as any of us, became so benumbed that he could scarcely walk. He +had brought a small flask of aguardiente, which he confessed he had +drained to the bottom, but it had apparently had a bad effect on him. +At length his sufferings became so great that we began to fear we must +leave him behind, as to carry him on to the tambo would be impossible; +though, if left behind, he would certainly die in a few minutes. While +he was in this state, Padillo volunteered to go forward, recollecting +that there was a spring in the neighbourhood, and urging us to try and +reach it. In a short time Padillo returned with the information that +the spring was only a little way on; so, while Uncle Richard took one of +Antonio's arms, I took the other, and Padillo, with a stick, kept +beating him severely about the body. Whenever Antonio cried out, +Padillo answered, "Never mind, friend, never mind; it's all for your +good." At length, what with pinching his arms, and Padillo's +flagellation, he was kept alive until we reached the spring. Here we +compelled him to drink a draught of water, though at first he showed a +great unwillingness to swallow it, like a person afflicted with +hydrophobia. In a wonderfully short time, however, he perfectly +recovered, and declared that he felt warm and comfortable. + +Uncle Richard and I then tried the experiment, as we were beginning to +feel the sensations Antonio had at first complained of. The attempt, +however, was extremely painful; indeed, I felt as if I had swallowed a +handful of needles, the which were pricking and tearing the whole +interior of my throat in their passage downwards. Directly I had +swallowed the water, however, I began to feel a comfortable glow, which +in a short time spread equally over me. + +The delay, however, might have been fatal to all of us, as darkness had +already begun to spread over the deep valley, and we could see no tambo +ahead. From the experience we had had, we were sure we could not rest +anywhere for an instant, while the danger was great in proceeding in the +dark. Still Padillo said he could find the way, and led us on at a +swinging trot, we doing our utmost to keep up with him; often, however, +I felt a strong inclination to sink down and enjoy a short sleep, if +only for a minute or two. I thought that I should soon catch up my +companions. The wind had increased, too, and a thick sleet drove +through the air, which made us feel as if pins and needles were sticking +in our faces. + +"This is very unpleasant," cried Uncle Richard; "but it won't last for +ever, that's one comfort." + +The darkness increased, and the thought that we should have to go on +through such weather as this during the whole night was terrible. + +Padillo was leading. Uncle Richard made Antonio walk before him; I, +with Lion, who kept close to my heels, continued talking to Uncle +Richard for some time, until the desire to stop suddenly overpowered me. + +"I hope we shall soon reach the hut," I said. + +"Cheer up--in a few minutes we shall be there," I heard Uncle Richard +say, and at that instant I sank to the ground. I heard the footsteps of +my companions as they moved on; but, seized with a kind of insanity, I +flattered myself that after a few minutes' rest I should be able to get +up and follow them. For some time, as it appeared to me, though it may +have been only for a moment or two, my senses completely left me; then I +became conscious that Lion had placed himself above me, and was licking +my hands and face. Then I heard him utter a loud bark; after which he +began to pull at my clothes, and bark louder and louder, until he +succeeded in arousing me. Mercifully, I had still strength sufficient +to get up; and as I did so, Lion still pulling at my trousers, I heard +Uncle Richard's voice shouting out, "Duncan! Duncan! come along." +Presently he appeared through the gloom; when he took my hand, and I +stumbled forward. + +Soon afterwards we heard Padillo shout out, "The tambo, the tambo!" + +Though we could not see him, guided by his voice we made our way to the +hut. Antonio had already got in and thrown himself on the ground, but +Uncle Richard roused him up, and compelled him to assist in lighting the +fire. We soon had a genial blaze, at which we warmed our chilled limbs. +I saw Lion looking up in my face, as much as to say, "Master, that was +a foolish thing you did just now; in another minute you would have been +dead, had I not kept some warmth in you with my body." I patted his +head, and he wagged his tail, and smiled as dogs can smile when pleased. +In spite of the blazing fire we kept up all night, we felt the cold +greatly. Indeed, I had never felt so chilled in all my life; it seemed +to pierce to the very marrow. Lion lay down close to the fire, and +almost singed his hair, showing that he too was suffering from the cold. + +Fearing that the fire might go out, Uncle Richard insisted that one of +us should remain awake; and he himself undertook to keep the first +watch. We first took our supper, but I fell asleep with a piece of food +in my mouth. The training Uncle Richard had had at sea enabled him to +keep awake, although I dare say he was as sleepy as any of us. + +He at last aroused me, and charged me not to let the fire get low. "I +can trust you better than I can Antonio or the guide," he observed. +"However strong may be your impulse to sleep, do not yield to it, as our +lives may depend on the fire being kept up." + +I promised to keep a faithful watch, and, rising to my feet, began to +walk about. In a moment more Uncle Richard was fast asleep. So strong +was the desire I felt to lie down and close my eyes, that I was afraid +of stopping, and kept pacing up and down the hut, rubbing my hands +together, and every now and then putting on an additional stick, or +scraping up the ashes. The time passed slowly by; the wind moaned amid +the bleak crags which overtopped the hut, and I fancied I heard the +cries of wild beasts. The sleepers, overcome with fatigue, did not even +move, and as I gazed at them they looked as if stretched out in death. +Every now and then, however, Lion lifted up his head, as if to see that +all was right; and just as my watch was over, and I was about to call +Antonio, he got up and stretched himself. "Now, Lion, if Antonio drops +asleep, remember to call me or Uncle Richard. I will trust you, good +dog. You understand?" Lion wagged his tail, and gave a low bark; and I +felt confident that he would do as I had ordered him. + +I then called Antonio, and gave him the same instructions and warning +which Uncle Richard had given me. + +"Do not fear, senor," he answered--giving, however, an ominous yawn; +"I'll keep my eyes open." + +Trusting more to Lion than Antonio, I lay down, and in a few seconds was +again fast asleep. How long I had remained in that state I could not +tell, when I heard Lion bark close to my ear, and felt him pulling at my +clothes. On sitting up, I saw that the fire had burned much lower than +it was when I gave up my watch, and that Antonio was asleep. I quickly +roused him up. + +"It was but for a moment, senor; my eyelids are so very heavy." + +"Look at the fire!" I exclaimed. "It must have been a very long moment +since you put anything on. Now, help me to make it up." + +We soon had the fire blazing brightly again, and Antonio promised to +keep awake until daylight. Had it not been for Lion, I should not have +trusted him. He probably was not aware that the dog had aroused me. + +Again I heard Lion bark loudly. The fire, as before, had burned down, +and Antonio was again asleep; but on looking out of the door I found +that day had broken. I was convinced that Lion had been observing the +fire rather than Antonio--considering it his duty to watch it--and that +he had called me simply because he saw that it ought to be made up. + +I now awakened the whole party, and by the time we had eaten a hearty +breakfast the light had increased sufficiently to enable us to continue +our journey. + +We encountered the same sad sights as on the previous day. There were +fewer animals, but many more dead bodies,--some evidently, from their +dress, being those of women and children. + +"They are those of unfortunate people who were attempting to escape from +the Godos," observed Padillo. "The mountains hereabouts are full of the +skeletons of those who have thus perished. But Heaven will punish our +oppressors." + +All we saw must have died on their first day's journey across the +Paramo. Those only who had strong mules, or who had found shelter in +the tambo, could have escaped. But it would not do to allow our +thoughts to dwell upon the subject. Our business was to push on as fast +as our legs would carry us. Directly we felt any of the sensations we +had experienced on the previous day, we drank at the nearest stream we +could reach, but we did not stop to take food. + +At length the fearful Paramo was passed; and yet this was only half the +size of many which exist in the country. Before dark we reached a tambo +situated at a lower level and exposed to the free air, but even there we +felt it very cold. In a few days we were rapidly descending, and at +last found ourselves almost on a level with the valley of the Cauca, +enjoying a tropical temperature, and on the borders of a dense forest. +By keeping more to our left we should have continued along the road to +Antioquia, but we were uncertain which party then possessed that town. +Padillo, however, volunteered to ascertain this while we remained in the +forest. We had already paid him his well-deserved reward, with which he +seemed highly satisfied. + +He had been absent some time, and we were anxiously waiting his return. + +"I am afraid he has been seized by the Spaniards, or compelled to +conduct one of their parties over the mountains," I observed. + +"He'll not come back, depend on that," remarked Antonio. "He has +fulfilled his engagement, and will not trouble himself further about +us." + +"I will trust the man; and if he can, he will return," said Uncle +Richard. "Here he comes, too!" + +Presently Padillo was seen hurrying towards us. "The Godos have +possession of all the towns and villages in this neighbourhood," he +said. "If you wish to avoid them, you must keep further down the valley +before you cross the Cauca, and then continue up the other side. I wish +that I could remain with you, but I know nothing of those western +mountains, and should be of no use as a guide." + +He now finally took his leave, promising not to forget us. + +Following his advice, we commenced our journey through the forest,-- +often having to cut our way with our swords, and sometimes to wade +across rapid streams which threatened to carry us off our legs. We ran +a risk, too, of being bitten by serpents; several of those we observed +being of large size, and others of an especially venomous character. +Tribes of monkeys were seen on either side of us, leaping from bough to +bough, and swinging on the sipos--sometimes running forward jabbering +and grinning, as if excited with anger at our daring to invade their +domains. As our food had run short, we were compelled to shoot a couple +of the rogues for supper. + +Night approaching, we made preparations for camping. We had to guard +not only against human enemies, but against jaguars, pumas, prowling +bears, and snakes. But having cleared a space of sufficient size, we +ran some sticks into the ground, which were interwoven with smaller +branches, so close together that no jaguar could thrust in its paw, or a +bear its snout, nor could any but the smallest snake crawl in. We then +thatched it over with large leaves of sufficient thickness to keep out +the heaviest rain. As close to the entrance as we dared we piled up +sticks, that we might keep a fire blazing all night. There was +certainly some little risk in having a fire, as it might attract the +attention of any Spaniards in the neighbourhood; but we believed that we +were so far off a highroad that no enemies were likely to discover us. + +Uncle Richard and I discussed our plans for the future, leaving Antonio +to go to sleep, that he might be the better able to watch when it came +to his turn. We alternately went to sleep for some hours, until we +thought Antonio could be trusted to keep the regular watch. + +I was awakened by Lion's loud bark, and by feeling him pulling at my +clothes. Seeing that I was aroused, he next attacked Uncle Richard in +the same way. On sitting up, what was my dismay to find that we were in +the midst of a bright blaze! The hut was on fire. Antonio, in order to +save himself trouble, had raked the embers close up to the entrance, and +had then fallen asleep. Uncle Richard, seizing him by the shoulders, +dragged him out; while I caught up his gun and the rest of our +possessions, and sprang after him through the flames, followed by Lion, +who would not leave the hut until he saw us in safety. The whole, +however, was the work of a few seconds. Had we remained much longer, +the roof would have come down upon us, and, at all events, have burned +us severely. As it was, we got pretty well singed. + +As we looked back and saw the flames ascending, we had good cause to +fear that the trees overhead would catch fire; and if so, a fearful +conflagration might ensue. It would be scarcely possible to cut our way +through the forest so as to escape it. The danger, therefore, was +imminent. Uncle Richard setting the example, we attacked the thatch, +and brought it to the ground; while with our swords we cut the grass +around wherever we saw the fire creeping along the ground. + +A few minutes more, and we should have been unable to subdue the fire. +Already some of the shrubs were singed in two opposite directions, but +fortunately we saw the snake-like flames creeping forward in time to +extinguish them. + +As there was no appearance of rain, we scraped the ashes of the fire +together, and placing on them a few unburnt sticks, sat ourselves down +close to it to wait until daylight, without which it would be impossible +to travel through the forest. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTEEN. + +A HARD STRUGGLE TO GET OUT OF THE FOREST--ANTONIO FINDS SOME +CHERIMOIAS--OUR ESCAPE FROM THE WOOD--DANCING AT A MARRIAGE-FEAST-- +HOSPITABLE ENTERTAINMENT--GUIDES--DOWN THE RIVER IN A CANOE--THE +SPANIARDS AHEAD--WE CAMP, AND WAIT TO PASS THEM AT NIGHT--AGAIN +EMBARKED--THE SPANISH CAMP--A NARROW ESCAPE--WE REACH THE CAUCA--WE +CROSS TO THE LEFT BANK, AND SEE JUAN WITH A PARTY OF CAVALRY ON THE +RIGHT BANK--PACHECO SWIMS ACROSS THE RIVER, AND RETURNS WITH A NOTE-- +JUAN COMES FOR ME ON A RAFT--UNCLE RICHARD AND ANTONIO PROCEED TO +POPAYAN--WE REACH A FARM ON THE LLANOS, AND CATCH AND TRAIN WILD HORSES +FOR JUAN'S TROOP--MODE OF CATCHING WILD HORSES--JOINED BY MR. LAFFAN. + +The morning found us hacking our way through the forest. As we could +discover no path to follow, it was slow work, and the trees seemed to +become thicker and thicker as we advanced. Under other circumstances, +we might have stopped to admire the wonderful variety of shrubs and +creepers which formed the undergrowth; as it was, we had to keep our +eyes constantly about us, for at any moment we might have to encounter a +huge boa or anaconda, or we might tread upon some venomous serpent, or a +tree-snake might dart down upon us from the boughs above. Monkeys, as +before, chattered and grinned at us. Parrots, and occasionally large +gaily-plumed macaws, flew off from amongst the topmost boughs, startled +by our approach. + +Hunger and fatigue told us that we had been struggling on for some +hours, so, coming to an open space, we determined to stop and dine. +Uncle Richard, taking Antonio's gun, shot a monkey and a couple of +parrots; and Antonio and I lighted a fire at which to roast them. But +we had no water, and the food made us feel very thirsty. I proposed, +therefore, looking for some cocoa-nuts, which, in that part of the +country, grow a long way from the sea. We searched around in all the +openings we could discover; at last Antonio shouted out that he had +found something which would satisfy our wants, and he appeared with a +huge melon-looking fruit under each arm. They were the wild cherimoia, +which grow to a larger size than the cultivated ones, although not +possessing their richness. The slight acidity of the fruit was, +however, very refreshing; and, our strength restored, we were soon able +to push on as before. + +Another day of hard toil was about to close. To pass the night without +a fire would be dangerous in the extreme, but as yet we had found no +open space in which we could venture to make one. As long, therefore, +as the light lasted we continued to press on, in the hope of discovering +some suitable spot. Antonio climbed up a palm, by forming his sash into +a belt which embraced the trunk--hoping to obtain a good view of the +surrounding region from the top. He told us, on his descent, that he +had seen the glittering of a river at no great distance to the +south-west, and that we should soon be out of the forest. Our continued +thirst, which even the fruit did not quench, made us wish to reach the +river as soon as possible; so we pushed on, and at length had the +satisfaction of getting out of the denser part of the forest, though +trees and shrubs extended down to the banks of the river. Darkness +overtook us; but the moon rose, and we were able to move forward without +much difficulty, expecting every instant to reach the stream. + +We were hurrying on, when strange sounds reached our ears. We advanced +towards the spot from whence they proceeded, and, on an open space near +the bank of the river, we caught sight of what at a distance might have +been mistaken for a dance of demons or hobgoblins. But as we drew near +we saw, as we had surmised, that they were Indians. Some of them were +performing a wild dance in couples, holding their arms above their heads +and snapping their fingers; while others were seated on the ground +looking at their companions. + +"There has probably been a marriage, and they are now performing the +dance which usually follows the ceremony by the light of the moon," +observed Antonio. "They are sure to be in good humour, and as they will +have plenty of food, they will be ready to treat us hospitably." + +On this assurance we approached the strange group, but the dancers +appeared too much engaged in their amusement to notice us. The music +was apparently produced by a sort of flageolet, accompanied by a +calabash containing some hard seeds or stones, which was rattled in time +to the wind instrument. + +Some of those seated on the ground at last catching sight of us, +advanced and inquired who we were and what we wanted. We told them that +we were travellers--our object being to reach the western side of the +valley; that we should be glad if one of them, well acquainted with the +country, would act as our guide, and that his services should be +liberally rewarded. This at once made them friendly; and begging us to +sit down, they brought us a calabash of chica, with which they were +regaling themselves, some venison, and a variety of cooked roots, and +some fruit. The feast was abundant, if not served in a very civilised +way, and we did ample justice to it. + +We found that our new friends were, as Antonio had supposed, celebrating +the marriage of one of their young men by a moonlight dance and feast. +The happy bridegroom had just reached his eighteenth year, and his +friends had helped him to build a hut and clear a spot in the forest for +sowing maize. Being an expert hunter, he had bought mats and earthen +pots with the produce of the chase, and had also made several utensils +in wood, besides a store of calabashes; these, with a few other +articles, served amply to furnish the abode to which he was to take his +young wife. He had also, they told us, presented his father-in-law with +a deer, part of which we were eating. The conjurer, who performs an +important part on such occasions, presented himself to us. Of course he +had been invited to the feast, since he acts as the officiating minister +and declares the couple united. Our friends, who had already indulged +somewhat freely in chica, continued passing the calabash round until +they grew very noisy; the old conjurer especially, who, with several +others, at length rolled on the ground and dropped off to sleep. The +more sober of the party, however, assisted us in putting up a little +hut, in which we took shelter,--while they, in spite of their scanty +clothing, lay down round the fire, more for the smoke which kept off the +mosquitoes than for warmth; indeed, we were now in a complete tropical +climate, differing greatly from that of Popayan. + +The provisions collected for the feast were sufficient to afford us a +good breakfast; and having rewarded our entertainers, we expressed a +wish to set out. Instead of one guide, three volunteered to come, +saying that each of us would require one; indeed, none of them were +disposed to go alone. We found, on reaching the river, that they +proposed proceeding down it some distance in a canoe. This, too, would +save us from fatigue; and there would be less risk, we hoped, of our +falling in with the Spaniards. + +We found, on conversing with the Indians, that they had anything but +friendly feelings for the Godos, who had carried off several of their +people, and on other occasions ill-treated them, compelling them to work +without reward. We therefore felt ourselves perfectly safe in their +company. Whenever we approached a spot--whether hamlet or farm--where +they thought it likely the Spaniards might be quartered, one of them +would go on ahead, and, keeping under shelter, creep up and ascertain if +such was the case. On each occasion finding that the coast was clear, +we continued down the stream. Throughout its course the country on +either side was wild and uncultivated, only small patches here and there +being occupied by settlers, who owned some of the vast herds of horses +and cattle roaming over the broad savannas which extend from the Cauca +to the foot of the mountains. + +In this region we met with three or four Indian families of the same +tribe as our companions, and we learned from the last we encountered +that a party of Spaniards occupied a spot on the bank of the river some +way lower down, but whether they were marching north or south we could +not ascertain. One thing was certain--we must either land on the +opposite side to that where they were posted, or pass by during the +night. Our Indian friends decided that the latter would be the safest +plan to pursue, so we ran the canoe a short distance up a creek with +reeds on either side and thickly wooded beyond; a place which afforded +us ample concealment, while there was abundance of wild fowl to supply +us with food. + +The Indians had brought some network hammocks composed of fibre, which +they hung up between the trees, and advised us to occupy while they +prepared supper. No sooner had we landed than Uncle Richard shot a wild +turkey, which we left with the Indians, while we went along the banks of +the stream in search of ducks. Our friends' eyes sparkled in the +anticipation of an abundant feast, as they saw us return with four brace +of fat birds. The Indians had a big pot, into which they put some +venison they had brought with them, and some of the birds cut up, with +vegetables of various sorts. These they stirred over the fire, and made +a very satisfactory mess, flavoured as it was with chili pepper and +other condiments. We ate our turkey simply roasted, however, as it +suited Uncle Richard's palate and my own. + +We had still some hours to wait until the Spaniards were likely to be +asleep, and the men on guard less watchful. At present, too, the moon +was so bright that we should certainly have been seen had we attempted +to pass their camp; but clouds were gathering in the sky, and we hoped +that before long the moon would be obscured, when we might slip by on +the opposite side unobserved. We therefore took advantage of the offer +the Indians had made us, and occupied their hammocks; while they sat +round the fire talking, and finishing the remains of the stew. Lion had +come in for his share of the bones, and now lay down under my hammock +with his nose between his paws. The moment I looked out he lifted up +his head, showing that, if not wide awake, he was as vigilant as need +be, and ready to give notice should there be any cause of alarm. + +We were completely in the power of the Indians, no doubt, who might at +any moment have deserted us, or delivered us up to the Spaniards, or put +us to death for the sake of our clothes and whatever valuables we +carried. But we had entire confidence in them. It must be confessed +that foreigners have occasionally been killed by the Indians, but in all +the instances I have heard the former were the aggressors. We had from +the first shown the simple-minded people that we trusted them, and their +wish was to prove that our confidence was not misplaced. + +The night was far spent when Pacheco, our chief guide, roused us up. + +"The moon has kindly veiled her face to enable us to pass the Godos +unperceived," he said. "Up, senors, up! we will start at once." + +Jumping out of our hammocks, the Indians quickly rolled them up and +carried them down to the canoe, on board which they had already placed +the rest of their property. By their advice we lay down in the bottom. +I kept Lion by my side, so that in case he should be inclined to bark I +might at once silence him. Pacheco steered, while the other two Indians +rapidly plied their paddles, and we glided at a quick rate down the +stream. We soon approached that part on the northern shore at which the +Spaniards were supposed to be posted, and we therefore kept to the +opposite side. Not a word was spoken, and we all lay close; so that, +had the canoe been seen, the enemy would have supposed that only three +Indians were in her. We could hear the guard relieved, with the +sentries exchanging the sign and countersign; and during the time this +ceremony was going forward our canoe shot by the place without +challenge. + +In the hope that we were safe, we were about to get up out of our +uncomfortable position, when a voice hailed us and ordered the canoe to +be brought up to the bank. + +"Paddle on!" I heard Pacheco say to his men; and directly afterwards a +shot came whistling over our heads. "Don't be afraid of that," again +whispered Pacheco--"we shall soon be out of sight of the Godos; although +they may fire, they will not hit us." + +The Indians, without uttering a sound to show that they felt any alarm, +continued paddling away. Shot after shot was heard; but the Spaniards +must have at length discovered that their prey had escaped them. + +We continued our course until the morning, when we saw before us the +Cauca, on the opposite side of which we wished to land. The Indians +crossed the larger river, and pulling up for some short distance, we +entered a creek thickly shaded by trees. Here there was no risk of +being seen by enemies on the other shore. Pacheco, who had engaged to +act as our guide, landed with us, and gave directions to his people to +wait his return. + +The stream by which we had entered the Cauca had carried us much further +down the course of that river than we had intended to go; we had, +therefore, now to make our way up it before we struck westward to Oro, +the town at which I had arranged to meet Mr Laffan. Our guide advised +us to continue along the bank of the river, as we should thus make our +way more easily than by striking diagonally across the country. Having +carefully husbanded our powder and shot, too, we were enabled to supply +ourselves amply with food; and we were never in want of wild fruits +which in most countries would be considered very delicious. + +It was towards the evening of the second day, and we were about to +encamp, when Antonio, who had gone down to fill a calabash with water at +the river, came back saying that he had seen a small party of cavalry, +who had come down to let their horses drink. + +"Are they Spaniards?" asked Uncle Richard. + +"No, senor; they appear to me, by their dress, to be Patriots." + +On this we all crept down to the bank, keeping under shelter, to observe +the strangers; and on seeing them we were convinced that Antonio was +right. While I was looking I observed another horseman, who by his +dress appeared to be an officer, join the people, and on watching his +movements I felt almost certain that he was my friend Juan. So +convinced was I of this, that I advanced to the water's edge and hailed +him; but the noise of the horses prevented him hearing my voice. "What +would I give to communicate with him!" I exclaimed. "Is no canoe to be +found near, by which we can cross the stream?" + +I explained my wishes to Pacheco. + +"If you are certain that they are friends, I will swim across," answered +Pacheco. + +I assured him of this, and hastily wrote a note to Juan, begging him to +wait for me, and I would try to get across the river to join him. + +Pacheco placed the note inside his hat, on the top of which he fastened +the short trousers and girdle he wore. He then cut two thick pieces of +bamboo, with a still larger piece pointed at both ends, and taking them +in his hand plunged into the water. + +"Are you not afraid of the alligators?" asked Uncle Richard, under the +idea that those creatures frequented the stream. + +"There are few above the rapids, and those only of small size," answered +Pacheco; "if one comes near me, he will feel the point of this bamboo." + +Resting his chest on the stout pieces of cane, and striking out with his +hands and feet, he made rapid progress towards the opposite shore. At +length Juan saw him coming, and at the same time observed us waving, +though he might not have known who we were. He probably guessed, +however, that we were friends, and that the Indian was coming across to +speak to him, for he rode towards the spot where our guide was about to +land. + +Pacheco gave Juan the note, and I saw him take a paper from his pocket +and write an answer, which he delivered to the Indian, who, without +stopping to rest, recrossed the river. Once I saw him give a dig with +his bamboo, but the object at which he aimed was not visible. It might +have been an alligator, or a water-snake, or a big fish; but it seemed +to concern him very little, for he again came towards us, and landed in +safety. + +I eagerly took Juan's note. + +"I will wait for you," it ran. "Come across, if you can find a canoe; +if not, wave your handkerchief, and I will have a raft formed, and come +for you. No time for more.--Juan." + +As Pacheco assured us that we were not likely to find a canoe within a +considerable distance, I at once made the sign agreed on, whereupon I +saw Juan's men immediately begin to cut down with their manchettes a +number of large canes which grew near. These they bound together with +sipos, and in a very short time a raft sufficiently large to bear +several persons was formed. The thick ends of some of the canes were +shaped into scoop-like paddles, and Juan with four of his men at once +embarked and commenced the passage of the river. As soon as the raft +was sufficiently near the shore he sprang to the land, and embraced +Uncle Richard and me. He looked paler and considerably older than when +we last parted, and as if he had seen much hard work. + +Uncle Richard's first question was, very naturally, for his wife and +daughter; and I too asked after my family. + +"They are still residing among the mountains, among some faithful +Indians, with Paul Lobo as their guardian. Dr Sinclair thinks it +prudent to keep in hiding while the Godos occupy Popayan, in case the +monster Murillo should order his arrest. I lately heard that he was +well, in spite of the trying life he, in common with so many other +Patriots, is obliged to lead." + +"And Dona Dolores?" I asked. + +"She is safe with your mother and Dona Maria; I myself escorted her to +their cottage, after I had the happiness of rescuing her from the +Spaniards." + +"Is she aware of her father's death?" I inquired. + +"What!" exclaimed Juan, "has the tyrant dared to murder the old man?" + +"I grieve to say so; as well as my poor uncle, Dr Cazalla, and many +other of our country's noblest Patriots." + +Juan lifted his hands to heaven, and prayed that their deaths might be +avenged. What a change a few months had produced in him! Instead of +the gay, thoughtless youth, he was now the stern soldier, ready to dare +and do any deed full of peril. I told him of the murder of Dona Paula; +at hearing which his eyes flashed fire, while he uttered expressions I +dare not repeat. + +I asked him what object he had in view in coming in this direction. + +"I am proceeding to Llano Grande, for the purpose of collecting horses, +and training them for our cavalry, as a large number of those in my +troop have died from hard work and exposure on the Paramo of Purace, +when we crossed the mountains to attack the Spanish convoy. I earnestly +hope that you, Duncan, will join me; you will be of the greatest +assistance, and I am certain that you are not required to help your +father or mother. They are less likely to be molested than if it were +known that you had joined them." + +I felt a great desire to accept Juan's proposal, and put it to Uncle +Richard whether I might not do so. + +He considered a minute. "Yes; I see no objection," he answered. "I +will continue my journey with Antonio, and try to communicate with Mr +Laffan. Possibly he may join you, and be of service." + +Accordingly, without hesitation, I at once agreed to accompany Juan; and +wishing my Uncle Richard and his two companions farewell, I embarked +with my friend. + +"As soon as I have seen Senor Ricardo safe, I intend to make my way back +to rejoin you," said Antonio. "If you are going to tame wild horses, +you will find it a long business, and are not likely to have left the +neighbourhood before I can get back to you." + +Juan told me that he intended to ride some miles further before camping, +as we were near a Spanish force; and should the enemy gain intelligence +of us, they might attempt to surprise us. + +When Lion saw me embark, he gave a look at his former master, as if to +ask which of us he should accompany; but Uncle Richard pointed to me, +and he immediately leaped on the raft. + +By the time we landed, Juan's small troop were in readiness to move on. +He had, fortunately, a spare horse, which I mounted; and I confess that +I felt my spirits rise wonderfully when I found myself in the saddle, +after so many days' journeying on foot. + +We rode on until we reached the borders of a wood which would serve to +shelter our camp-fires. There the horses were picketed, while patrols +were sent out to give due notice of danger. Though in our native land, +we had to act as if in an enemy's country. However, we invariably found +the country-people ready to give us all the information we required as +to the whereabouts of the Spaniards, and were thus able to avoid them. +Had it not been for this, the Patriots would have been crushed by the +superior force the Spaniards were bringing against them. While we could +always learn the movements of our enemies, and obtain an ample supply of +food, the Spaniards were unable even to trust their own spies; and it +was only by means of strong foraging-parties that they could collect +provisions. + +We thus reached our destination,--a farmhouse situated on a slope at the +foot of the mountains, with the wide llanos stretching out before it. +Having an extensive view over the plain from this point, we could see +the approach of an enemy from a great distance; and, according to the +strength of their force, we might either prepare for resistance, or make +our escape. An enclosure ran round it, formed by trunks of trees driven +into the ground close together. It had been formed years before, for +the purpose of resisting attacks by the Indians, and would still enable +a body of men to hold their own against any small force of infantry or +cavalry, though, for the present, we did not expect to be molested. + +The men Juan had brought with him were accustomed to the life of the +llanos, and no time was lost in commencing the work for which they had +come. The very next morning the whole party started off provided with +lassoes,--Juan and I accompanying them. The herds of wild horses were +accustomed to come close up to the farm, so that we had not to go far +before we fell in with a herd. The men then separated into parties of +two, forming a circle round the animals they wished to capture. The +wild horses, seeing strangers advancing from all sides, closed up +towards the centre, not knowing in which direction to make their escape; +when the men galloped forward, lasso in hand, each singling out an +animal, round whose neck he seldom failed to throw the noose. The horse +would then dash forward, but was as speedily brought up by the rope; and +the well-trained steed of the Llanero, throwing itself back, and +pressing its fore, feet against the ground, effectually checked it, and +threw it upon its haunches, or right over on its back. Another Llanero +would then dexterously cast his lasso round the animal's fore-feet, and +by a jerk bring it round its legs. By slightly slackening the rope +round its neck, the horse was enabled to get up, when its first impulse +was to dash forward; but it was brought to the ground by the lasso round +its legs, with a jerk sufficient, it would seem, to break every bone in +its body. The horse would then lie motionless while its hind feet were +secured. + +The first horse I saw caught in this manner, I thought was dead; but +after a time it regained its consciousness, and, giving some convulsive +plunges, again got on its legs. Before it had even time to look about, +it was led off by some of the Llaneros to a post near the farm, where, +in spite of its desperate struggles, it was saddled and bridled. Its +strength regained, it began to bite, plunge, and kick in all directions, +the Llaneros nimbly getting out of the way. One of the more experienced +riders, watching his opportunity, then leaped into the saddle, and +signed to one of his companions to cast off the lasso from its legs. +The animal, finding itself free, darted off, and then commenced to back, +plunge, and whisk round and round, sometimes dashing on for a few paces +at a furious pace, and then recommencing its eccentric movements. The +rider, however, stuck on; and another Llanero coming behind, +administered a lash with his long cutting whip, which made the poor +animal start off with a snort like a scream. No one but a well-trained +horseman could have kept his seat in the way our men did. As it darted +ahead, two other Llaneros rode on either side to keep the wild animal +straight. Off it went across the level country for a league or more, +occasionally stopping to back and kick; each time its efforts grew +fainter, until at last we saw it come back, its eyes bloodshot, its +whole body covered with foam and blood, and perfectly bewildered. It +was then unsaddled and tied to a post, there to remain until hunger made +it willing to accept the food and water offered to it. Thus, in the +course of a day a number of horses were captured; but they were all +young animals, and as yet scarcely fit for work. + +Next came the operation of breaking them in, which occupied a much +longer time. In this, Juan and I took a part. Every man we had with us +was engaged from sunrise to sunset--or even later, when the moon shone +brightly--as it was of the greatest importance to have some well-trained +animals ready for service as soon as possible. + +Fresh men continued to arrive, having made their way over the mountains +to avoid the Spaniards, bringing their saddles and bridles, arms and +accoutrements. Of course, they at once took part in catching and +training the horses. The young animals were most easily broken-in, but +they were less capable of enduring fatigue than the older horses. + +We had been about a month thus engaged, when, as Juan and I were leaving +the farm for an afternoon's sport, as we called it, we caught sight of a +horseman--evidently, from his costume, not one of our own men--galloping +across the plain towards us. As he drew nearer, I thought I recognised +his bearing and figure. + +"Hurrah!" I exclaimed; "I believe that's Mr Laffan." + +"I hope so, indeed," answered Juan. "He will be a host in himself; and +I suspect he will be able to train a horse as well as the best of us." + +Mounting our steeds, we galloped forward to meet him; and with unfeigned +pleasure I soon saw that it was no other than my former tutor. + +"I am thankful to fall in with you again, my dear fellows," he +exclaimed. "I thought at one time that I should never have got here. +Mr Duffield told me where to find you, but those rascally Spaniards +nearly caught me. I escaped them, but I had to hide away for several +days until the coast was clear. However, here I am, and shall be mighty +glad of some food, for I'm desperately sharp-set." + +We returned to the farm with Mr Laffan, where we gave him our usual +fare,--dried beef and plantains; for we were not living luxuriously. +Except some chica, we had no beverage stronger than coffee or cocoa to +offer him; but he declared that such provender would serve him as well +as any other. + +As soon as the meal was over, Mr Laffan begged to have a fresh horse, +and insisted on accompanying us. "I have had a little experience in +this sort of work," he said, "and may be able to catch a horse or two. +At all events, I can break-in a few. I have no wish to eat the bread of +idleness." + +Mr Laffan was as good as his word, and took good care to select a +first-rate animal for himself, which, by dint of constant practice, he +got well broken-in. Juan and I were equally fortunate, and were much +indebted to him for the training of our steeds. + +As few persons came near the farm, which was remote from all +thoroughfare, the Spaniards did not get notice of our proceedings; and +we were thus, by dint of hard work, and the valuable assistance rendered +by Mr Laffan, able to get together a very efficient body of cavalry. + + + +CHAPTER FOURTEEN. + +THE CAMPAIGN COMMENCED--WE JOIN THE PATRIOT ARMY--ORDERS TO HOLD THE +FORT OF GUAMOCO AGAINST ALL ASSAILANTS--A THUNDERSTORM--SURVEY OF THE +FORT FROM A HEIGHT--THE ENEMY IN THE DISTANCE--WE TAKE POSSESSION OF THE +FORT, AND REPAIR IT--SPANISH OFFICERS APPEAR--TWO OF THEM SHOT BY OUR +MEN--THE SPANIARDS ATTACK US FIERCELY, BUT ARE DRIVEN BACK--THEY RETURN, +TO MEET WITH ANOTHER REPULSE--THE ENEMY AT LENGTH RETIRE--WE EXPECT +ANOTHER ATTACK. + +Important events had meanwhile been taking place. Bolivar had assembled +a considerable army, of which upwards of two thousand foreign troops-- +mostly disbanded British soldiers--formed the most serviceable part. +Whenever they met the enemy, the English exhibited the hardihood and +courage which they had displayed on many hard-fought fields in the +Peninsula, and lately at Waterloo. We heard, too, that they were led by +several experienced officers who had taken part in those campaigns. + +The fearful atrocities which had been committed by Murillo, Boves, +Morales, indeed by almost all the Spanish generals, had aroused the +spirit of the people throughout the country, and we looked forward to +the time when we should free our beloved land from the presence of the +hated tyrants. + +At length being considered in an efficient state, with wild delight we +received orders to join the Patriot forces. Before long we had several +skirmishes with the enemy, and in a gallant charge--in which Mr Laffan +distinguished himself--we put to flight a superior force of King +Ferdinand's hussars. These hussars were the scorn of our wild horsemen, +and the contrast between the two was great indeed. The arms and +appointments of the hussar were a sad encumbrance in this climate. He +had his lance, sword, carbine, and a brace of pistols; and his clothing +and trappings were those of a Hungarian trooper. He was obliged to have +his horse's tail cut short, for on several occasions a Llanero was known +to have galloped up to the rear of a trooper, dismounted in an instant, +and seizing the horse by its long tail, by a sudden jerk contrived to +throw it on the ground, and then despatched the rider. Our fellows, +when charging, used to lay their heads and bodies on the necks of their +horses, carrying their lances horizontally in the right hand about the +height of the knee, so that when the Spaniards fired they seldom managed +to hit them. + +I was seated with Juan in the hut which formed our headquarters. We had +not troubled ourselves with tents, for our men slept on the ground +during the dry season, except when we were quartered in a farmhouse or a +village. We had been talking over the prospects of the campaign, when +an orderly, riding up to the entrance of the hut, delivered a despatch +to Juan. He read it eagerly. + +"We are ordered to ride on to the Pass of Guamoco, as no infantry can +reach it in time to prevent the Spaniards--who are marching towards it-- +obtaining possession," he said. "Order the assembly to be sounded, +Duncan." + +While I hastened to carry out his order, he hurriedly wrote a few lines +on a rough piece of paper, which had not a very official appearance, and +gave it to the orderly, directing him to deliver it to the general. In +a wonderfully short time we were in the saddle, and moving towards our +destination. + +Juan then told me that he had been directed to take possession of a fort +of some strength, which guarded the entrance of a pass through which +Bolivar intended to make his way, but which, if occupied by the enemy, +would be impracticable. It was thus of the greatest importance that we +should take possession of it. "The general orders me to hold the fort +until an infantry regiment arrives to garrison it," added Juan. + +"I hope they will put the best foot foremost, then, for I have no wish +to be cooped up in a fort when we should be doing service in the open +country," said Mr Laffan. + +We pressed forward at a rate which none but light horsemen such as ours +could have kept up. Nothing stopped us: up hills and across valleys we +scampered; pushed through forests, or waded over marshes; forded or swam +rivers when they crossed our way, without a moment's hesitation. We +ran, indeed, a regular steeplechase. We were obliged to camp at night, +however, to rest and feed our horses; but during the day we halted not a +moment longer than was absolutely necessary. Hardy as were our steeds, +they at length began to show signs of fatigue, but Juan encouraged the +men to proceed. + +"They will have time enough to rest when they get to the fort," he +said,--"provided the enemy are not there before us." + +We had gone on all day, and were still about four leagues from our +destination when night overtook us. The road ahead, our guide informed +us, was worse than any we had yet passed over, and that had been bad +enough. It would be dangerous, he said, if not altogether impossible, +to get our weary steeds over the ground in the dark. Still Juan, +obedient to orders, would have continued the route, when a thunderstorm, +which had been for some time gathering in the sky, burst over our heads. +We were, fortunately, near a farm with a number of outbuildings and +sheds about it, beneath which we took shelter. The rain fell literally +in sheets of water, which quickly flooded the road; the lightning +flashed with a vividness I had seldom before seen; and the thunder +rattled and crashed as if huge rocks, rather than impalpable clouds, +were being hurled against each other. + +Juan now saw that it would be impracticable to advance until daylight; +but he also knew that the enemy would not venture to march, so that, +even if they were at an equal distance from the fort, we should get +there first. He accordingly announced that he should remain during the +night; so the men employed themselves in cooking their supper, rubbing +down their horses, and in other ways, until they lay down to sleep in +the driest spot they could find. The officers occupied one of the rooms +of the house. + +It was somewhere about two or three o'clock in the morning when Juan +roused me up. + +"I intend to ride on ahead of the party, in order to reach an elevated +spot by daybreak, from whence I can take a survey of the fort and the +surrounding country, and therefore learn the ground on which we may +possibly have to operate," said he. "You will come with me, Duncan?" + +I sprang to my feet. "I am ready to set out immediately," I answered, +giving myself a shake. + +Juan's servant brought us some cups of coffee, which we drank while our +horses were being got ready, and in less than five minutes we had +mounted. The storm had passed away, and innumerable stars shone out in +the blue sky with wonderful brilliancy. We were obliged, however, to +walk our horses, as it was with difficulty we could in many places see +the road. Our last day's journey had been over ground of a considerable +elevation, and we were still ascending. + +Daylight broke while we were still on the road, and pushing on our +horses, we reached the spot for which we were aiming. It was a lofty +bluff with precipitous cliffs below us, beneath which there were several +lesser elevations, and beyond, a wide valley opening into a vast plain. +We here found ourselves far above the clouds, which spread like a canopy +over the scene at our feet--a few tree-tops, the tower of a village +church, and here and there, perched on heights, the roofs of some +farmhouses. Immediately below us was the fort we were to occupy. It +seemed as if we could almost leap down into it; though it was in reality +too far off to be commanded from the height on which we stood, even had +the enemy dragged up guns; but the path by which we had come was +altogether impracticable for artillery, so we had no fear on that score. +A short distance beyond the fort ran a rapid stream, which, descending +from the mountains on our left, passed through the valley, and +contributed materially to the strength of the position, as troops +marching to the attack would have to ford it in face of the fire from +the garrison. As far as we could see, the fort was still unoccupied; +but the mist prevented us ascertaining positively if this was the case. + +"I would that the clouds were away," said Juan, "to learn whether they +are now concealing our approaching foes!" + +Here and there the mist appeared to be breaking or rising, and we +watched eagerly for the moment when the whole face of the country would +be exposed to view. + +"Our men ought by this time to have got nearly round to the fort," +observed Juan, looking at his watch; "and once inside, I hope that we +shall be able to defend it against the Spaniards, though they may come +only a few minutes after we have taken possession." + +The sun now rose over the mountain-tops, his beams gradually dispelling +the mists which had obscured the view. Still they hung over the valley, +and we remained uncertain as to whether the enemy had had time to reach +the fort below us. While we were thus eagerly watching, we caught sight +of the head of our column rounding the foot of the mountain; but though +visible to us, it could not as yet be seen by any one in the fort, and +we were thus still in doubt as to the important fact we wished to +ascertain. + +"I gave directions to Captain Laffan to send forward and find out +whether the fort was occupied, before exposing the troop to view," said +Juan. + +As he spoke we saw two of the horsemen ride forward, and Juan resolved +to remain until the result was known. We now took a careful survey of +the country before us. + +"I can nowhere see a body moving which has the appearance of troops," +observed Juan. "But there are so many woods and inequalities in the +ground by which they might be concealed, that we must not trust to that. +If, however, they have not already got possession of the fort, we shall +have ample time to make such preparations as may be required for our +defence. Duncan, take you the glass and see if you can discover +anything which may have escaped my eye." + +I did as he requested, and swept the surrounding country again and +again. At last I saw what I thought looked like a dark shadow creeping +slowly along over the brow of a hill from the westward, and descending +towards us. Here and there was a slight glitter, as if the sun's rays +were playing on polished steel. + +I handed the glass to Juan, who was soon satisfied that what we saw was +a body of troops. As, however, they were still some leagues away, and +as they had a river to cross and some heights to climb, it would be +several hours before they could reach the fort. We now felt sure that +it, at all events, was not yet occupied. Dismounting, therefore, we led +our horses down a steep path, by which we were at length able to rejoin +our regiment. About the same time the scouts came back with the +information that the fort was unoccupied. We accordingly rode forward +and took possession. + +It consisted of a strong stockade composed of whole logs of wood, with a +deep trench in front of it. The huts were in a very dilapidated +condition, but they would still afford some shelter to the garrison; +while a stone tower in the centre, also surrounded by a trench, formed a +sort of citadel as well as a storehouse. It comprised a ground floor, +with a vault beneath, which served as a magazine, and two stories above +without any divisions. In one of these were a few rough articles of +furniture, which had been intended for the use of officers; and in the +upper story, which had been used as an hospital, were a number of +bedsteads covered with hides; while above the roof was a loopholed wall +running all round, for musketry. Behind the fort was a wide space +completely protected by impracticable heights and the fort in front, on +which our horses could be turned out to graze. The Spaniards had most +unaccountably left behind three guns, which, though spiked, were +serviceable in other respects; and in the storeroom we found shot for +them. + +We had brought, I should have said, nearly two dozen horse-loads of +ammunition--including powder for the guns which we had hoped to find--as +well as the same number of animals laden with provisions. But, of +course, as they had to travel as fast as our horses, they could carry +but a very limited load. + +Not a moment was lost in setting to work to repair the fort. Juan told +the men how we had seen the enemy approaching, and consequently they +laboured away with might and main. Trees were cut down from the +hill-side above the fort, and dragged in to repair the stockade. The +trench was cleared out; and shelter erected for the horses, which it +would be absolutely necessary to retain inside in case of requiring them +on an emergency. The men, accustomed from their earliest days to hard +labour, toiled away without cessation. By night we had repaired the +fort, and were ready for our enemies should they appear; but as yet we +had not got a sight of them, and I began to fancy that Juan and I had +been mistaken. Under Mr Laffan's directions, our farriers had +contrived to extract the nails with which the guns were spiked, and all +three were mounted and got into position during the night. A vigilant +watch was kept, for should the enemy really have been approaching, they +would very probably attack us before daylight. + +Morning, however, came, and no sign of the foe being in sight. Though +we had a flag with us, and a flagstaff stood in the fort, Juan would not +have it hoisted; while the men were directed to keep as much under cover +as possible, so that the Spaniards might not discover we had possession +of the fort. + +All the work outside had been finished, but we continued strengthening +it, and making such, improvements as were necessary in the inside. + +It was about noon when one of the sentries gave notice that he saw some +people on the opposite side of the river. We watched them. Evidently +they were Spanish officers reconnoitring the fort, and from their +movements they seemed to doubt whether it was already occupied. At +last, apparently satisfied that they were in time to take possession, +two of them began to ford the stream. Before they had got half-way +over, however, several of our men, without orders, fired, and they both +fell, being carried down by the current. Juan rebuked his followers for +this wanton act--at which the men seemed very much astonished. Several +others who were following, and of whom we caught a glimpse, immediately +retreated. + +We now expected every moment to see the main body approaching to the +assault, as it was not likely they would allow us to retain peaceable +possession of so important a post, if they fancied they could capture +it. Mr Laffan had charge of the guns, with the few men among us who +had ever had any practice with artillery. There were, however, no more +than two to each gun who had loaded and fired one before. Mr Laffan +had to keep running backwards and forwards, to see that they put in the +powder first and the shot afterwards, and rammed it home. In a short +time the Spaniards advanced under cover, showed themselves on the bank +of the stream, where they extended their line, and commenced a hot fire +at the fort. We, keeping under shelter, did not reply to it until they +commenced crossing the stream, when we opened on them with our guns. +They evidently had not supposed that we possessed artillery; for they +were at once thrown into confusion, and began to retreat, when numbers +were brought down by our musketry, while our guns, being reloaded, again +sent their shot among them. + +We now ran up the Republican flag and shouted "Victory;" but we were +mistaken in supposing that the enemy were put to flight. In the course +of a short time a far larger body appeared, led by other officers, who +behaved with great courage. At once they dashed across the stream,--we +receiving them with a hot fire, our men loading and discharging their +pieces as fast as they could, while our guns, considering the +inexperience of the gunners, were well served. I could scarcely help +smiling as I saw my old dominie spring from gun to gun, and point it at +the thickest of the foe. One of the officers who appeared in command +must have fallen, and although the others behaved with considerable +gallantry, they failed to induce the men to come up to the stockades. +Once more they retired across the stream, and many lost their lives. + +After this they contented themselves with getting behind such cover as +they could find, and firing at the fort. Had they possessed guns, the +tables would, I suspect, soon have been turned, as our comparatively +light defence must quickly have been knocked to pieces. The thickness +of the stockades, however, prevented their bullets from entering, and a +few only of our men who exposed themselves were hit,--two being killed, +and three wounded. Out of our small garrison, however, that number was +of consequence. + +We continued firing away with the guns and musketry at the points where +the Spaniards were concealed, but what damage we produced among them we +could not tell. This style of fighting lasted several hours, while we +every moment expected to be again attacked. Not a Spaniard who had +fallen wounded was allowed to live, for our bullets quickly put them out +of their pain. + +At length the firing ceased, and we saw the enemy retiring--a round shot +or two sent after them by Mr Laffan expediting their movements. The +victory was decidedly on our side; but we knew full well that we might +again be attacked by a superior force, and perhaps that very night. +Therefore, as before, a vigilant watch was kept, so that, should they +attempt a surprise, we might be ready to receive them. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTEEN. + +CAPTAIN LAFFAN AND I GO OUT TO RECONNOITRE--A PRISONER--GAINING +INFORMATION--THE SPANIARDS TWICE ASSAULT THE FORT, AND ARE REPULSED WITH +SLAUGHTER--WE LOSE A NUMBER OF MEN--A COUNCIL OF WAR--SCARCITY OF +AMMUNITION AND PROVISIONS--DON JUAN INVITES TWO OF US TO OBTAIN +ASSISTANCE--LAFFAN AND I UNDERTAKE THE DUTY--WE SET OUT--NARROWLY ESCAPE +THE SPANIARDS--ENTER A TOWN LATELY SACKED BY THEM--OBTAIN REFRESHMENT-- +DIRECTED ON OUR COURSE--A BIVOUAC FOR THE NIGHT--WE PROCEED NEXT +MORNING--LAFFAN'S HORSE BITTEN BY A SNAKE--MY COMPANION TRUDGES FORWARD +ON FOOT--WE REACH A FARM--OBTAIN SHELTER AND FOOD, A HORSE AND A GUIDE, +AND CONTINUE OUR JOURNEY. + +Juan and most of our little garrison exulted in the idea that, after the +defeat we had inflicted on the Spaniards, they would abandon the attempt +to take the fort, and retire from the neighbourhood. + +"Do not be too sure of that," said Captain Laffan; "they will watch +their opportunity, and attempt to surprise us if we are off our guard. +They know the value of the pass too well to leave us in quiet +possession. They may be looking all this time for a path over the +mountains, to try and take us in the rear; though they would find that a +hard matter, to be sure." + +Juan, however, still persisted in his belief that the Spaniards had +retired, and turned their attention to some other enterprise. Fearing +that this opinion would make him and his followers less vigilant, I +volunteered to go out and reconnoitre. + +"You shall not go alone," said Mr Laffan. + +"No," I answered; "I intend to take Lion with me." + +"I intend to go also," he replied. "I have done a little skirmishing in +my day, and three pairs of eyes will take in more than two. Indeed, I +do not think you should count much on the services Lion may render." + +"He will, at all events, give us timely notice should we get near a +sentinel, or should one of the enemy approach us," I remarked. + +"You are right," answered Mr Laffan. "We will go together; and I am +pretty strongly of opinion that we shall bring Don Juan word that the +enemy are not far off." + +"But shall we go by night or day?" I asked. + +"At night we should have the advantage of being able to get up to the +enemy without being seen," said Mr Laffan; "but we should be quite as +likely to find ourselves in their midst before we had discovered where +they were. Whereas in daylight, though we may find more difficulty in +approaching them, we shall be able to see any of their men moving about +at a distance. During the day, too, they will be less likely to be on +the watch for scouts." + +It was finally settled, after a discussion in which Juan and the other +officers took part, that we should leave the fort just before dawn, and +remain concealed until daylight, when we were to make our way in the +direction in which it was most probable that we should find the +Spaniards, if they were still in the neighbourhood. This plan was +finally agreed on; and Captain Laffan, Lion, and I, at the hour fixed +on, left the fort, and made our way across the river to a grove of trees +which afforded us sufficient concealment; while, should the Spaniards +themselves have sent out any reconnoitring party to ascertain what we +were about, we should to a certainty discover them. + +As soon as it was daylight we continued our route, Lion going on just +before me, and turning round frequently to see if I was following. By +his conduct, I was very sure that he understood the object of our +expedition. We kept as much as possible under cover; occasionally when +we came to open ground we ran across it in a stooping posture, so that, +should we be seen by those at a distance, we might be mistaken for +animals. We had gone nearly a league without observing a human being, +when we caught sight of a small hamlet in the distance, with a wood on +one side, and a stream partly encircling it. + +"That's a likely place for the enemy to have occupied," observed Mr +Laffan; "and if they are in the neighbourhood, we shall find them +there." + +We now approached more cautiously than before, while Lion showed a +considerable amount of excitement, as if he believed that an enemy was +near. Presently he stopped short, then advanced slowly, like a tiger +stealing on its prey, glancing back every now and then to ascertain if +we were following. Again he stopped, and then came running towards us, +when, placing himself directly before me, he pointed with his nose in +the direction he had before been taking. + +We at once guessed that some one was concealed behind the brushwood; but +if a sentry, he had not discovered us, or he would have fired. We +accordingly determined to seize him and gain what information we could. +Making a sign to Lion to keep behind, we cautiously crept on, bending +almost to the ground, and completely hidden by the bushes. I made a +motion to Lion to seize the man, if there was one. He understood me; +and as he sprang forward we heard a half-stifled cry. The next instant +we saw Lion struggling with a soldier, who had dropped his musket, and +was endeavouring to draw his knife to thrust into the dog's body. + +We grasped the fellow's arms, and quickly mastered him. It was at once +evident that he had been sitting down, while we were approaching, to +light his cigarrillo; or perhaps he might have dropped off to sleep. +Releasing him from Lion, we threatened him with instant death if he +opened his mouth or attempted to escape. Then, each of us taking an +arm, we dragged him along towards the fort. + +"If we carry this fellow with us, he will to a certainty be put to +death," I observed to Mr Laffan. + +"I don't like the idea of that," said he. + +"Nor do I," I answered. "The best thing we can do is to get what +information we can out of him, then bind him to a tree, and leave him. +The Spaniards will discover him in time, and will yet be none the +wiser." + +"A good idea," said Mr Laffan. + +The captive Spanish soldier looked imploringly at us, fully expecting +that his minutes were numbered. + +"We do not intend to kill you," I said, "if you will give us a faithful +account of the number of troops in this neighbourhood, and what it is +intended they should do,--whether they are about to attack the fort +again, or to march away; and if so, where they are going." + +"Have I your word of honour?" asked the Spaniard, looking at me, very +much puzzled to know who I could be, as he heard me speak in English, +and then address him in genuine Spanish. + +"You have my word. We have no wish to murder our enemies," said I. + +"That's more than I can say for my countrymen," he answered. "I will +tell you frankly, senor. There are a thousand men in yonder camp. It +was intended to attack you again to-night. Our officers have resolved +to capture the fort at all risks, and they have told the men it must be +done. If you will undertake, senor, to protect my life, I will follow +you, and serve you faithfully. I would rather do that than have again +to assault yonder fort." + +"I believe what you say," I answered; "but I cannot venture to take you +with me, for the Patriots would instantly put you to death, as they have +vowed to do with every Spaniard who falls into their hands." + +"I must submit to my hard fate, then," said the man. + +"You will regain your liberty in a few hours," observed Captain Laffan. + +"Ah, senor, if I am caught I shall be shot for sleeping at my post. If +you will give me my liberty I will run away, and not again fight against +you." + +"The very best thing such a fellow as you can do. I think we may trust +you," said Captain Laffan. + +We led our prisoner on until within a short distance of the fort, when, +instead of binding him, we let him go. He bolted away to the +northward,--showing that he fully intended to carry out his promise. + +On our return to Juan, he thanked us warmly for the service we had +rendered. + +As may be supposed, we were all on the watch; and about two hours before +dawn we caught sight of the Spaniards advancing to the attack. As they +crossed the river, we opened a heavy fire upon them; to which they +replied, and then rushed forward, attempting to storm the stockades. +The fort, from one side to the other, was in a blaze of light. Each man +was fighting with desperation, and hurling back those who crossed the +ditch and endeavoured to climb the walls. After the Spaniards had made +several desperate attempts, they were driven back; and again getting +under shelter, contented themselves with keeping up a hot fire at us. +We, of course, replied in the same fashion; but, except that both +parties expended a large amount of powder and shot, no great loss was +suffered. In the attack a considerable number had been killed and +wounded, and not a few of our own men had been hit. + +We waited, fully expecting that with the return of daylight the enemy +would make another assault. And we were not mistaken; but the result +was the same as before, though I cannot say that, had they persevered, +they would not have got in. Greatly to our relief, however, we heard +the recall sounded. Once more they retired; and two of our men sallying +out, traced them back to their former quarters. + +We were for some time employed in repairing the damage done to the fort, +and in attending to the wounded; and while we buried our own dead, we +sent out a party to throw the Spaniards who had fallen in the river, as +the easiest way of disposing of them. Several poor fellows who were +found wounded were mercilessly bayoneted, in spite of all Juan, Mr +Laffan, and I could urge to the contrary. Our men were generally +sufficiently obedient; but when told to spare their enemies, who could +no longer oppose them, they turned away with scowling countenances, not +even deigning to reply--evidently resolved to carry out the fearful +spirit of revenge which animated them. + +Our men were again rejoicing at having repulsed our foes, when Juan +summoned us to a council of war. + +"Though we may rejoice at the victory we have gained," he said, "yet it +has been dearly bought by the death of so many of the garrison, and by +the expenditure I find, of nearly all our ammunition. Should another +attack be made, we have not a sufficient supply to repulse the enemy. +Still I know that you and all my men will fight to the last, and that we +may offer an effectual resistance with our spears and swords. We are +ordered to hold this post, and I am resolved not to quit it alive, or we +might possibly cut our way through the enemy. After the losses they +have received, they may not attack us for some time; so I propose to +send off any two of you who may be willing to go, to endeavour to reach +the general and obtain reinforcements, as well as a further supply of +ammunition and provisions; though, in regard to the latter, we can live +on horse-flesh, if need be, until assistance reaches us." + +Juan looked at the other officers; but they made no reply. He then +turned to Captain Laffan and me. "Are you willing to go?" he asked. + +"With all my heart," answered Captain Laffan; "and I am sure I may say +the same for Duncan. We gained some experience of the country in our +reconnaissance the other day, and I feel sure we shall get off without +being discovered." + +"I am perfectly ready to go," I added; "but I am very unwilling to leave +you, Don Juan, in so critical a position." + +"Think not of me," answered Juan. "I have a duty to perform, and I may +well rejoice if I am called upon to die for the sake of my country." + +We accordingly settled that we were to set out about three hours before +dawn, which would give us time to get beyond the enemy, and out of their +sight, when we should have the advantage of daylight for seeing our way. +I confess I felt more out of spirits than usual when I bade my friend +Juan farewell. A presentiment of evil oppressed me, as I thought of the +dangers by which he was beset. + +It was shortly after two o'clock in the morning, when Mr Laffan and I, +having our horses' hoofs muffled, and followed, of course, by Lion, led +them down to the river; crossing which, we took the road we had before +followed for some distance. We then turned to the left, along the base +of the hills. Between these and the hamlet occupied by the enemy, it +was possible that patrols might be met with, and if so we had agreed to +mount and cut our way through them. As we were on foot, we hoped that +we should not be perceived until close upon the enemy; we should then +have a good chance of escaping. We trudged on, therefore, holding our +horses by the left rein, so that we might mount in a moment. + +We had got a good way to the westward, and, as we fancied, clear of the +enemy, when, on doubling a high rock, round which the path led, we came +suddenly upon a picket. Owing to the precautions we had taken, however, +they did not hear or see us until almost within a dozen paces. To leap +on our horses and dig our spurs into their flanks, was the work of a +moment; and before the Spanish soldiers could spring forward and seize +our reins, we had already got to a considerable distance beyond them. +They immediately opened fire, but, owing to the darkness and their +surprise, took very bad aim. Possibly, not hearing any sound, they took +us for phantom horsemen; but they continued to pepper away in the +direction we had taken, long after the darkness had hidden us from their +sight. + +Not supposing that we should meet with another picket, we now dashed +forward at full speed, the increasing light enabling us to see our way. +Our horses, being perfectly fresh, went on for several leagues without +flagging, and we now felt confident that there was but little chance of +our being pursued. Not, however, being acquainted with the country, we +knew that unless we could obtain a guide we should very likely lose our +way, or take a much longer route than was necessary. With this object +in view, therefore, seeing a small town on our right we rode towards it, +to procure the assistance we required, and obtain refreshments for +ourselves and steeds. Being uncertain who had possession of the place, +I rode into the town, as I could pass there for an Englishman or a +Spaniard, as the case might necessitate. I could thus obtain the +information, while Mr Laffan remained on watch at some distance. + +The place at first appeared deserted; but at length I saw three persons. +One was lying in front of a door-step, another was apparently watching +him,--both being badly wounded,--while a third, leaning against the +wall, watched me as I approached. + +"Friends," I asked, "what has happened lately in this town?" + +"The Godos have passed through it, and as we were Patriots they burned +down a large part, and killed most of us. Look at yonder woman; she +alone survives of all her family. You see almost all the remaining +inhabitants," and the speaker uttered a bitter laugh. + +"I can feel for you, for I am a Patriot," I answered; "and I want to +find my way to the army of General Bolivar." + +"I would act as your guide, but I have no horse," answered the man; "and +I could not sit one if I had; look here, senor,"--and he showed me a +severe wound on his side. "Nor can we help you," he continued, "for +there is no young man left in the place who would be able to go; but I +can direct you on your road. And you will rejoice to hear, senor, that +the last news which reached us is that the general has beaten the +accursed Godos; though whether it is true I know not. Good news never +travels so fast as ill news." + +I tried to cheer my new friend, and he undertook to obtain some +refreshments for us. + +"You may enter any of the houses you please, for most of them are empty; +but to mine you are welcome." + +While he went to find some food and fodder for our horses, I rode back +to where I had left Mr Laffan. + +On our return we found plenty of fodder for our horses, but the fare +with which we were supplied was very scanty, almost everything having +been carried off by the plunderers. + +"If, however, we would wait," our host said, "he would find some fruit, +and procure some fowls which had escaped." + +As we were anxious to proceed, we begged that he would point out the +road we were to take. This he did, and we bade him farewell. + +We had still some hours to ride before nightfall, when we must, if +possible, find shelter. As far as we could judge, it might take us +three or four days to reach the Patriot camp, and some time must elapse +before relief could be sent to Juan,--and what might not occur in the +meantime? + +Whenever we pulled rein, Mr Laffan stood up and took a survey of the +country. + +"It is wise to ascertain what's moving when traversing a country, or in +our course through life," he observed. "We may thus know where to find +our friends and avoid our foes." + +Frequently, however, the view on either side was bounded by woods, the +trees rising to a prodigious size. Many of them ran up to an amazing +height in a straight line before they began to branch out. From some of +the fig species, various shoots descended perpendicularly, where they +took root, so that we had no little difficulty in making our way through +these woody columns. Between the openings we caught sight of the +mountains rising to the skies; and occasionally a stream crossed our +path, or ran foaming along on one side or the other. + +We had hoped to reach some friendly village or farmhouse, where we might +rest during the hours of darkness, and obtain better food for our horses +than they could pick up in the forest; but though we pushed on until an +hour after sunset, no glimmering window-light appeared to beckon us +towards it, and we had at last to look about for an open space where we +might bivouac. We accordingly dismounted, and tethering our animals, +commenced searching for wood to light a fire. We ran no small risk, as +may be supposed, of rousing up a venomous serpent, or disturbing a boa +during its rest, while at any moment a jaguar or puma might pounce down +upon us, or a bear make its appearance. We succeeded in obtaining fuel +enough to make a pretty large fire, and by its bright flames we the more +easily obtained a further supply of wood. We had, however, but scanty +materials for a meal,--some fruit, and a few pieces of Indian corn +bread. I gave part of my share to poor Lion, who looked up wonderingly +at finding himself put on short commons in a land of plenty. There was +sufficient grass, however, for our horses to obtain a feed, and as we +had watered them a short time before, they were not so badly off. + +Having collected fuel enough to last for the night, we cut a number of +sticks, which we ran into the ground to form a shelter against any +sudden attack of wild animals during the night; and then, pretty well +tired out, lay down to rest. Every now and then Captain Laffan or I got +up to change the position of our horses, but we dared not leave them far +from the fire, lest some jaguar might spring out and kill one of them, +although it might not be able to carry off its prey. Great as was our +anxiety, we by turns got some sleep; and at dawn, again mounting, we +rode forward. The sky, however, was cloudy, and we had greater +difficulty than before in guiding our course. + +We rode on for some hours, until the pangs of hunger and the necessity +of resting ourselves made us resolve to stop. I was fortunate enough to +kill a good-sized monkey, which was grinning down at us from a bough +close above our heads; and we also found as much wild fruit as we +required. So, having reached the banks of a stream, where we and our +horses could get water, and where there was abundance of grass, we +halted, and quickly had a fire lighted, and part of our monkey roasting +before it. The other part I had given to Lion, who was quite ready to +eat it uncooked. + +We again moved forward, but we both felt very doubtful whether we were +going right. For my own part, I know but few sensations so disagreeable +as the idea that one has lost one's way. We were passing along a low +sandy spot, with high bushes and trees on either side, when Captain +Laffan's horse gave a sudden start; and looking down, we saw a small +shiny snake gliding away. The horse had evidently been bitten, for we +could see the mark of the creature's fangs above the fetlock, and soon +the leg began to swell. The poor animal proceeded with the greatest +difficulty. What remedies to apply we neither of us knew, but we had +heard of the existence of a small snake called the aranas, the poison +from whose fangs is so subtle that animals bitten often die within an +hour; and even when remedies are applied, few are ever saved. + +"The creature might have bitten either of ourselves," I observed. + +"I do not think this species ever attacks man,--though I should not like +to put the matter to the test," answered Captain Laffan. + +There was no use in our stopping, especially as there might be other +snakes of the same kind in the neighbourhood. We therefore, as long as +the poor horse could move, pushed forward; but its pace became more and +more sluggish, as the limb continued to swell. At length the animal +stopped altogether, and my companion, feeling it tremble, leaped off. +Scarcely had he done so when it came to the ground, and lay struggling +in violent convulsions. Mr Laffan contrived to take off the saddle +before it was damaged. In a few minutes, foaming at the mouth, the +horse died, evidently in great pain. + +"No use groaning over what cannot be helped," observed the captain. +"You take the saddle, and put it before you; I'll carry the bridle; and +I must try to get another horse as soon as possible." + +The delay was serious, but it could not be helped; so we moved along, +Mr Laffan trudging by my side. I asked him to get up, but he +positively refused to do so. + +The belief that we had lost our road was still further depressing. I +thought especially of the serious consequences which might ensue to Juan +should we not soon obtain the assistance of which we were in search. At +length my eye fell on a papaw-tree, and what appeared to be a hut just +below it. Riding on, we saw a Creole peasant-woman walking along and +spinning, evidently near her home. At first, on seeing us, she seemed +disposed to fly; but on our calling to her and assuring her that we were +friends, she stood still, waiting for us to come up. Our wants were +soon explained: we should be glad, of a horse, a guide, and especially +of some food. Food she could give us. Her husband was out, she said, +but he would soon return, and he would procure a horse, of which there +were several broken-in on the farm; and perhaps he himself would act as +our guide. + +Eager to push on, our patience was greatly tried; though we waited and +waited, the woman's husband did not appear. At last Mr Laffan proposed +going out and catching one of the horses. + +"But then you will not know in what direction to ride," observed the +woman. "You have no right, either, to take the horse without my +husband's leave." + +"Might makes right," answered Mr Laffan; "however, we will not act the +part of robbers, but will pay you handsomely for the horse." + +This promise satisfied the poor woman. + +Fortunately, just as we were setting out the husband returned, and was +evidently well-pleased at the thought of getting a good price for one of +his animals. He also undertook to guide us, if we could wait until the +next morning at daybreak, and would promise him a reward. He took good +care, indeed, that we should not start before then, as it was nearly +dark before he returned with the horse. It was a tolerably good animal, +though rather small, and we willingly promised him the price he asked. +He described to us feelingly the terror he had been in lest the Godos +should visit his farm; though, excepting a few cattle and horses, there +was little they could have obtained. His wife had been in still greater +fear lest they might carry her husband off as a recruit; but he had kept +in hiding, and she had conveyed food to him from day to day, until the +Spaniards had left the neighbourhood. + +We managed to rest with tolerable comfort on heaps of Indian corn +leaves, and slept securely, without the fear of being attacked by +jaguars, bears, or other wild beasts, or being bitten by serpents. + +Faithful to his promise, our host appeared the next morning with the +horse for Mr Laffan, while he brought a smaller animal for himself. +His wife insisted on putting up a supply of food for the day, and was +evidently unwilling to receive any reward. After a good breakfast we +started, thankful to find ourselves on the right road. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTEEN. + +OUR GUIDE COMPLAINS OF OUR RAPID PACE--HE LEAVES US--WE MEET CAPTAIN +LOPEZ--OUR DOUBTS AS TO HIS OBJECT--IN A DESERTED HUT--WE MEET UNCLE +RICHARD AND A BODY OF INFANTRY--WE TURN BACK WITH HIM--A RAPID STREAM-- +FINDING A BRIDGE--THE SPANIARDS ADVANCING--A RUSH TO GAIN THE BRIDGE--WE +REACH IT FIRST--A FIGHT--THE SPANIARDS DEFEATED--NO PRISONERS TAKEN--WE +APPROACH THE FORT--CAPTAIN LAFFAN AND I RIDE ON TO RECONNOITRE--SIGNS OF +DISASTER--OUR MEN FIRE--A FLOCK OF GALENACHAS RISES FROM THE FORT, WHICH +APPEARS IN RUINS--DEAD BODIES SCATTERED ABOUT--DISCOVERY OF THAT OF +JUAN--WE RAISE A TOMB OVER HIS GRAVE--THE ARMY OF BOLIVAR--DESCRIPTION +OF THE GENERAL--TREACHERY OF COLONEL LOPEZ--ATTEMPT TO ASSASSINATE +BOLIVAR--NUMEROUS ENGAGEMENTS--PRAISE FROM THE GENERAL--MY RETURN HOME-- +AN INTERVIEW WITH DONA DOLORES--SHE JOINS THE ARMY--WAR THE GREATEST +CURSE THAT CAN AFFLICT A COUNTRY--CONCLUSION. + +We endeavoured to make up for lost time by galloping as fast as our +horses would go, whenever the ground would admit of our doing so. Every +moment might be of consequence. Should the Spaniards again attack the +fort, we knew too well that our friends would have a hard matter to hold +it. Our guide frequently exclaimed that we should knock up our steeds, +or bring them to the ground. + +"Never fear, my friend," said Mr Laffan; "if we do, we must pick +ourselves up again." + +"But your bones, senors, your bones; you will break them or your necks," +murmured our guide. + +"Never mind--we must do the best we can; you don't know what we +Englishmen are made of," said Mr Laffan. + +"But I may break my neck, and then what will become of my poor +Margarida?" cried our guide. + +"We will do our best to console her, and find her another husband. On, +on!" cried Mr Laffan. + +In vain were all the expostulations of our guide. The dominie lashed +his little steed, and up hill and down dale we kept on. Probably Tomaso +would have left us to pursue our course alone and find our own way, had +not my friend wisely kept back a portion of the price of the horse, lest +such a trick might be played us. At last Tomaso pointed out what he +called the highroad, and assured us that by keeping straight on we +should in time reach the Patriot camp. How far off it was, however, he +did not say. He now begged hard for the sum we owed him. + +"Here it is, my friend; you have well earned it, I own," said Mr +Laffan, handing him the amount. + +He was profuse in his expressions of gratitude. "A fortunate journey to +you, caballeros; and may the Patriot cause prove triumphant," he added, +as, making a low bow, he turned his horse's head and rode back the way +we had come. + +We had not got far when we saw a horseman galloping in hot haste towards +us; by his dress and accoutrements we knew him to be an officer. As he +got nearer I recognised him to be Captain Lopez. He pulled up, and +began to address us before he recognised either of us. + +"Can you tell me, caballeros, if a division of the Spanish forces is +stationed anywhere in the neighbourhood? I am told that such is the +case." + +"And what object, Captain Lopez, have you for wishing to know where to +find the Spanish forces?" asked Captain Laffan, looking sternly at him. +"Surely you are not going to desert to them!" + +Captain Lopez now recognised us, and looked very much confused. He +answered-- + +"No; desert to them, no! I am not a deserter, but I wish to ascertain +their whereabouts, that the Patriots, who are advancing in this +direction, may be prepared to encounter them." + +Captain Laffan looked incredulous, but simply asked-- + +"Whereabouts are we likely to find the Patriots, as we wish to join them +without delay, and possibly can give them the information you are going +to obtain?" + +I remarked that he said nothing about Juan, or that our object was to +bring him assistance. Captain Lopez, however, inquired where Juan's +troop had gone, observing that it was supposed he had joined Bolivar. +Whether he really knew the true state of the case, I could not tell. + +Captain Laffan was as reticent as at first. "Now, Captain Lopez, we +must not delay; we possess all the information you wish to gain, and I +would advise you to turn back with us, or you may chance to fall into +the hands of the enemy." + +In answer to this remark Captain Lopez made several excuses, and at last +said, "I'll ride on for a short distance, and then follow you back. +Farewell, senors, for a short time;" and he continued his course in the +direction he was before going. + +"The scoundrel!" exclaimed Captain Laffan as we galloped on; "I am very +sure that he is on no good errand. We should have served the cause by +shooting him." + +We had very little time to make remarks, as we had generally to ride one +before the other, but our suspicions of the object Captain Lopez had in +view made it more important than ever that we should reach the Patriots +without delay, and hurry them on to the succour of Don Juan and his hard +pressed garrison. + +Another night arrived, and we were still unable to ascertain how far off +the Patriots were encamped. Had our horses been able to move, we +should, in spite of the dangers of the road, have pushed on in the dark. +There was just light enough for us to discover a deserted hut. At the +back was a garden overgrown with grass, into which we turned our horses. +A well in one corner supplied them with water, and we were sure that +they would not wish to stray; while the thick hedge and trees which +surrounded the garden concealed them from the view of any one passing. +We ourselves were not likely to be discovered unless by a person +entering the hut. The food with which our good hostess Margarida had +supplied us afforded a tolerable supper, with something over for +breakfast. We could not doubt but that early the next day we should +fall in with the Patriots. + +Scarcely yet persuaded that Captain Lopez was acting treacherously, as +Captain Laffan supposed, I half expected to see him return. + +"If he does, it will be with a party of the enemy," said my companion, +"and we shall be made prisoners, unless we get due notice and can gallop +off." + +This idea made us more wakeful than we should otherwise have been, for +Lion doing duty as sentry was sufficient protection. The morning, +however, came, and no enemy appeared. I shared my portion of the +remaining stock of food with Lion, who had been for some time on short +commons, as vegetable diet did not suit his constitution. + +We had gone some distance when, as we were stopping to water our horses +at a stream, my ear caught the tramp of feet. + +"There is a large body of infantry coming along the road," I exclaimed; +"I trust that they may be friends, or we shall have to cut across the +country to avoid them." + +Captain Laffan listened, and was satisfied that I was right. + +"We must approach cautiously," he said, "and be prepared to turn to the +right-about if they should prove to be enemies." + +We instantly mounted and rode on, and before long came in sight of the +troops. + +"They are Patriots, I am sure, from their dress, and the flags they +carry," said Captain Laffan. + +He was right. As we got nearer a mounted officer rode forward. To my +infinite satisfaction I saw that he was Uncle Richard; while Antonio +came close behind him, dressed as an officer. + +"Hurrah! rejoiced to see you, Duncan; and you too, Captain Laffan," +exclaimed Uncle Richard as he recognised us. "Where do you come from? +Tell me all about it as we ride along; you will accompany me, for we +shall soon halt to let the men dine, and you can then get what food you +require." + +We briefly told him the object of our journey. + +"I knew that Don Juan was ordered to hold the fort, but I little +supposed that he was so hard pressed. However, I hope we shall be in +time to relieve him. You see these fine fellows?" and he pointed to the +men. "I have been busy for some months, while you were away, raising +and drilling them; and though I cannot say much for the uniformity of +their appearance, I am pretty sure that, if well led--as I flatter +myself they will be--they will do good service when we meet the enemy. +I have had some difficulty in getting efficient officers, but I chose +the best men I could find, independent of all other considerations. I +have a Black, and two pure-blooded Indians, while the rest are Creoles. +I found your former servant Antonio so intelligent and brave a fellow, +that I gave him a company." + +"I am delighted to hear it," I answered. "In a noble cause like ours +there should be but one consideration,--to find the best men for every +post; and if they have once been slaves, they are more likely to fight +for freedom." + +Our great object now was to march forward and attack the Spaniards +before they could capture the fort. That we should come up with the +enemy in time, I could not help thinking, was very uncertain. Our men, +however, were well able to advance as rapidly as any troops could move. +Except their muskets and powder, they were unencumbered with any +accoutrements, or indeed with any superfluous clothing. They required +but little food, and that of the coarsest description. Accustomed to +the use of firearms from their boyhood, they had quickly been turned +into efficient soldiers. We had intelligent guides, also, who knew the +country, and were able to point out the best paths for our advance. + +A short time only was allowed for the men to take their dinner, after +which we marched on again until nightfall. At first it seemed somewhat +strange to find myself seated round our camp-fire with Antonio, and to +hear him addressed as "Captain;" but I did not allude to our former +relative positions. In a short time, however, as he bore his honours +well, and behaved in a thoroughly officer-like way, this feeling wore +off, and it seemed quite natural to speak to him as an equal. He was +only one of many who at that period rose from the ranks. One of the +bravest generals in the Patriot army had been a slave. Indeed, General +Paez had been a herd-boy, and Arismendez a fisherman. Bolivar was one +of the few Patriot leaders of high family, for the Spaniards had put to +death the larger number of the men of influence and Liberal principles, +before the struggle for liberty began. + +The next morning we recommenced the march two hours before daylight, +when the men appeared fresh and in good spirits. We had again advanced +some distance after our noonday halt when we came to a rapid river, +running between high cliffs, over which, we had learned from our guides, +a strong wooden bridge had been thrown. Had it not been for this bridge +the passage of the river would have cost us great delay, as we should +have had to descend by narrow pathways to the bottom of the cliffs, then +to throw a pontoon across, and ascend on the other side. In the face of +an enemy this would have been impossible. + +I had ridden forward, curious to examine the structure of the bridge of +which our guides had spoken. I found that strong timbers had been fixed +on the ledges in the cliffs projecting over the stream, serving to +support a platform; from this platform others were pushed forward on +either side, the inner ends lashed to the first platform, while a centre +one joined the two. Railings ran along on either side of this ingenious +structure, which had a roof supported on poles--the object apparently +being to prevent the wood-work from rotting with the wet. + +I had got a short distance along the bridge, when I caught sight of a +body of men coming over the ridge of a hill scarcely a mile off. +Another look convinced me that they were Spanish troops; while the +advance-guard of our force was nearly as far off on the other side. I +waited for a moment longer, to judge whether, by the movements of the +Spaniards, the latter had been seen; but I judged that they were +concealed by the trees and rocks which lay between thorn, while they on +their part had not discovered the enemy. The possession of the bridge +was of the greatest importance, and I knew that the Spaniards, so soon +as they should discover the Patriots, would make a rush down the hill to +gain it. Partly hid as I was by the roof and railings of the bridge, I +hoped that I had not been seen. To avoid the risk of being discovered, +therefore, I slipped off my horse, and turning its head led it back +until I got under shelter of some trees; when, mounting, I galloped as +hard as I could until I met Uncle Richard, who instantly gave the word +to advance at the double. + +The Spaniards, who were already descending the hill, rushed down with +headlong speed on discovering us, hoping to gain the bridge before our +party had secured it. We at once dashed across to hold it against the +Spanish advance-guard, which had nearly reached it. As the enemy saw us +crossing they opened a hot fire, but, the distance being considerable, +their bullets did no damage, and we were soon across without a casualty. +Directly afterwards the head of our column appeared, and impetuously +charged along the bridge. They came not a bit too soon, for already we +were engaged with those of the Spaniards who had advanced ahead of their +companions, whose numbers were every moment increasing, and who pressed +us fearfully hard. In the meantime the Spanish troops, as they +descended the hill, opened fire on our men,--those who were waiting to +cross replying to it from the other side. + +As I looked up the hill I feared, from the numbers descending, that we +should be shot down before a sufficient number of the Patriots could +cross to hold their own until our main body had got over. Our men, +however, pressed forward and formed rapidly. In another minute we had +secured our ground, and driven back the enemy a dozen yards or more, +affording sufficient space for the main body to form up as they crossed. +Several had been shot, and had fallen over into the torrent, which was +already dyed with blood. + +The order was now given to charge. The Spaniards, in their eagerness to +reach the bridge, had been thrown into disorder as they descended the +hill. Our left wheeled, turned their flank, and drove them down towards +the river; while our right stood its ground. The contest was short, but +sharp. In the course of a few minutes, it seemed, the larger number of +the Spaniards were hurled over the cliffs; while the rest, in utter +confusion, attempted to retreat up the hill, but were followed by our +nimble-footed men, and cut down or bayoneted. + +No victory could have been more complete. Not a Spaniard who was taken +was allowed to live. Of the whole force, numbering some five or six +hundred men, those only escaped who contrived to hide themselves in +ditches or behind bushes or rocks, or whose activity enabled them to +keep ahead of their pursuers. Our chief casualties had occurred while +our men were crossing the bridge, but, in all, we had lost comparatively +few. + +The summit of the hill gained, we halted to reform our troops, and then +once more advanced. Whether or not the Spaniards we had defeated were +those who had attacked the fort, we could not tell, as not a prisoner +had been saved. In vain did Uncle Richard call to his followers to +spare the lives of those who yielded; his orders were not listened to. +The men only followed the custom of that savage warfare, and the example +of the Spaniards, upon whom they thus fearfully retaliated. + +Once more we advanced. Another day passed; and it was late on the next +before we reached the neighbourhood of the fort. I looked out eagerly +to ascertain whether the besiegers were still before it, but as yet not +a sign could I discover of the enemy. The hamlet occupied by the +Spaniards appeared to be deserted. I now felt convinced that the body +we had defeated was part of the force which had been besieging the fort, +while the remainder had probably marched in an opposite direction. We +had seen nothing of Captain Lopez, however, and he certainly was not +with those Spaniards whom we had encountered. + +Now came the question, What was the fate of the garrison? Had they been +able to hold out until the Spaniards, growing weary of the attempt, had +given it up? or had the fort been successfully assaulted, and its +defenders cut to pieces? If so, the Spaniards must now have possession, +and it would be our turn to attack them, and to attempt its recapture. +This would not be so difficult a task to us as it had proved to the +Spaniards, as Captain Laffan and I knew every point about it, and every +spot from whence it was assailable. + +The first thing to be done, however, was to make a reconnaissance; and +Captain Laffan and I rode on for this purpose. With our glasses we saw +from a distance that no flag was flying; and as we got nearer we +discovered that the flagstaff itself was broken short off, and that the +tower was fearfully shattered, while parts of the stockades were thrown +down, and the whole fort seemed in the most dilapidated condition. + +"A bad omen, that," observed my companion; "but, at the same time, it +may have been shot through, and a puff of wind have blown it down." + +My heart began to sink, as, still further lessening our distance, we +could see no one moving in the fort. It appeared to be deserted. As +this, however, might not be the case--for the garrison might possibly be +keeping concealed--we advanced cautiously, halting again just out of +musket-shot. We waited for some time, but not a moving object could we +discern. By this time we had been joined by several men on foot. +Captain Laffan ordered them to creep forward and fire, thinking that the +salute might elicit a reply should an enemy be holding the fort. As the +report went echoing among the rocks, a whole flight of galenachas winged +their flight to the summit of the neighbouring cliffs, whence they could +watch an opportunity of again descending to finish their horrible +banquet. We knew now, to a certainty, that no living beings occupied +the fort. What had been the fate of our friends? + +Eager to ascertain the worst, we rode forward, and, fording the stream, +made our way over a mass of ruins which filled the ditch, into the +interior. The scene which presented itself told a sad tale. There lay, +round the tower, the bodies of friends and foes in equal numbers, with +limbs torn, clothing burnt, and countenances blackened. With a +sickening heart I searched for one form, if it could be distinguished +from the other disfigured remains of humanity. It was not long before I +recognised the uniform my brave friend had worn. He was lying directly +under the wall, while one hand still grasped the jewelled sword I had +seen Dona Dolores gird to his side. Yes, it was he, my gallant friend! +I knew him by his features, though scorched and blackened and fearfully +changed, and by a ring he had worn, as well as by the watch in his +pocket. + +Captain Laffan found me kneeling by the side of my dead friend, unable +to restrain my grief. + +"It is the fortune of war, Duncan. A more gallant fellow never +breathed; and he died a noble death--in discharge of his duty," said my +late dominie. "Don't give way, my boy; he did not die in vain." + +"But Dona Dolores!" I exclaimed; "her heart will break when she hears +of it." + +"It's of sterner stuff than that, I've a notion. But come, we must see +at once about giving him a soldier's grave while there is yet time, for +we may soon have other work to do." + +Taking my dead friend's sword, and his ring and watch, that I might give +them to Dona Dolores, I rose from the ground. + +In a short time Captain Antonio came up with the advance-guard. On +counting the slain, we found that they numbered more than half the +garrison. The rest might possibly have cut their way out; if not, they +must have been taken prisoners, and, to a certainty, afterwards shot. A +still greater number of Spaniards had been destroyed. All that we could +suppose was, that Juan, when he found that successful resistance was +impossible, had blown up the tower, and perished with such of the +assailants as had made good their entrance. + +A grave was dug for Juan beneath a wide-spreading tree, some little way +up the valley. We there laid him to rest; and a volley having been +fired over his remains, a heap of unhewn rocks was piled up above them +to serve as the young Patriot's tomb. + +"When our cause is triumphant, and peace returns, I will erect a marble +monument to his memory," I said. And I kept my word. + +Our men, in order to save themselves trouble, cast the remainder of the +bodies into the river,--caring very little for thus horribly polluting +the pure water. I had before thought war a terrible thing, but the +scenes I had lately witnessed impressed me still more forcibly with a +horror of its fearful results. What hundreds--what thousands, I might +say--of human beings had perished miserably within the last few months! +How many more, too, were doomed to die! Then I thought of the towns and +villages committed to the flames; the corn-fields, the orchards, and +gardens destroyed; and, more than all, of the widows and orphans who, +while bewailing the loss of those they loved, their protectors and +bread-winners, were doomed to struggle on in poverty; and the numberless +families, formerly in affluence, now reduced to absolute beggary. Such +was the state of my native land. And yet no one complained--all were +ready to struggle on in the cause of Liberty; blaming, not those who had +risen to fight for freedom, but the tyranny of their oppressors as the +cause of all they endured. + +While we were encamped at a neighbouring hamlet, which afforded +sufficient means for defence, and enabled us to watch the fort, a +despatch arrived for Juan, ordering him to evacuate it. Alas! had it +come sooner, he and his companions might have preserved their lives, as +I believe he would have succeeded, had he made the attempt, in cutting +his way through the enemy; but, influenced by a stern sense of duty, he +had held it after all hope of successfully defending it had gone. This +added greatly to my grief at his loss. + +General Bolivar had heard of the corps Uncle Richard had raised, and now +sent forward requesting him to join his army without delay. By forced +marches across the mountains, in which both officers and men suffered +not a little, we reached the general's camp, and I had the honour of +being introduced to him. I little expected to see so young a man. In +person he was small, but well-made and muscular, and able to go through +astonishing exertion--frequently marching on foot over mountains and +plains without exhibiting the slightest fatigue. His eyes were dark, +large, and full of fire and penetration, denoting wonderful energy of +mind and greatness of soul. His nose was aquiline and well-formed, his +face rather long, and his complexion somewhat sallow. As Uncle Richard +and I had the honour of being invited to his table, I had an opportunity +of seeing him in his social moments. He was lively in his manner, full +of anecdote and conversation; and it was said that, like Buonaparte, he +possessed the power of reading at once a man's character, and placing +him in a position where his talents and abilities would prove useful to +his country. He was also thoroughly disinterested, and so little regard +did he pay to himself under the most severe privations, that he was +always ready to share what he possessed with his companions-in-arms, to +his last cigar or his last shirt. He was always cool, and invariably +displayed the most undaunted courage. He was, to be sure, hasty in his +temper, and often made use of intemperate expressions, abusing in no +measured manner those who had annoyed him; but, at the same time, he was +ever ready to make atonement to the person whose feelings might have +been undeservedly wounded. In his bosom revenge was never harboured, +and it was owing entirely to the atrocities committed by the Spaniards +on the Patriots that he was induced to carry on against them that +fearful war of extermination which so long raged throughout the country. +Bolivar might not have been a hero to his own valet, but by those who +truly understand heroic qualities he should be deservedly placed on a +high niche in the temple of Fame. I may add that he was temperate in +his diet, drank but a very moderate quantity of wine, never touched +spirits, and that he seldom smoked. Generally he was the last to retire +to rest, and the first to rise. + +Soon after joining the army, to my surprise I met Lopez, now raised to +the rank of colonel. He appeared to be intimate with many of the +officers, but kept aloof from Captain Laffan and me, as well as from +Uncle Richard, whom I should properly designate as Colonel Duffield. + +We had marched forward until we heard that Murillo, with a large force, +was in the neighbourhood. + +One night Captain Laffan and I had been invited to dine with several +English officers, and our host told us that he expected Colonel Lopez. +However, when the dinner-hour arrived Colonel Lopez did not appear. A +message was despatched to his quarters, but he was nowhere to be found. + +"It's my belief," exclaimed Captain Laffan, "that the fellow has +deserted! You will see that I am right; he was intending to do so when +we met him." + +Dinner over, we again retired to our quarters, and all was stillness in +the camp. As I wished to take a few turns to enjoy the cool night air, +I accompanied one of Bolivar's aides-de-camp who was about to visit the +outposts, when we met a small body of troops marching towards +headquarters. The officer in command gave the countersign, and they +were allowed to proceed. Just then, who should we meet but Colonel +Lopez, who informed my companion that he had some news of importance to +communicate to General Bolivar respecting an intended movement of the +enemy which he had just obtained from a deserter, and requested that he +might be conducted to the general's tent. + +"If you will remain here, I will immediately acquaint the general with +what you say, and beg that you may be admitted," was the answer. + +I returned with the aide-de-camp, but left him near Bolivar's tent to +deliver the message. I had not got many yards off, however, when I +heard a volley of musketry fired close to me, and directly, as it +seemed, at the tent. An instant afterwards I saw a party of men, who +must have followed close upon us, disappearing in the darkness. + +"To arms!--to arms! the enemy are upon us!" was the cry, and soon +general confusion ensued. The troops got under arms, and some fired in +the direction taken by the fugitives, but in the darkness it was +impossible to see whether any were hit. The fear was that the general +must have been killed, and every one was in dismay until he himself rode +round, quieting the alarm of the men. He had fortunately quitted his +tent a few minutes previously, and was not many yards off when the +firing took place. On examining his cot, it was found that three or +four bullets had passed right through it, so that he must have been +killed, or severely wounded, had he not providentially left his tent. + +Few in the camp slept that night. A treacherous attempt had evidently +been made to assassinate our general. When morning came we looked out +in the direction of the enemy's camp. On the ground lay two bodies, and +a party was sent out to bring them in. One of them was that of Colonel +Lopez; and on his person was discovered a paper proposing a plan to +Murillo for penetrating the camp with a party of Spaniards disguised as +Patriots, and putting Bolivar to death. It was countersigned as +approved of by the Spanish general. Such, then, was the fate of the +rejected suitor of Dona Dolores. + +I have not space to describe the several engagements which followed, but +Colonel Duffield and Captain Laffan, who soon became a major, gained the +credit they deserved for their gallantry on numerous occasions, and I +had the satisfaction of being praised by Bolivar himself. However, the +severe life we led at length affected both Major Laffan and me, and +Colonel Duffield, in whose corps we served, insisted that we should +return home to obtain the quiet and rest we required. The road was now +open to Popayan, and we were able to travel with a small escort of +invalids and wounded men, who, like ourselves, were unfit for service, +and were anxious to return home. + +With feelings of considerable anxiety we rode up to my father's house, +for what might not have happened during our absence we could not tell. +Great, therefore, was my joy when we were greeted at the entrance by my +mother, Dona Maria, Rosa, and jolly little Hugh, who all threw their +arms about my neck at once, and then bestowed a similar affectionate +greeting on the major--who declared, as tears streamed down his cheeks, +that it gave him as much joy to see them all well, as it had to beat the +Spaniards in the last battle we had fought; while Lion, who had followed +at my heels, was next saluted in nearly the same fashion, while he +barked, yelped, and leaped about, evidently delighted to get home. Dona +Maria looked very pale, and was evidently anxious about Uncle Richard, +but we were able to give a very favourable account of him. Like many +other wives, she had learned to endure her anxiety. + +My father was out, but he soon returned, and expressed his satisfaction +at the high encomiums which had been bestowed upon me by Colonel +Duffield, and even by Bolivar himself. + +"I have just come from visiting Dona Dolores," he said. "She has heard +the report of Don Juan's death, but will not believe it; and I am afraid +that it must be your painful task, Duncan, to convince her." + +As soon as I could unpack the sword and the other articles which I had +carefully preserved, I returned with my father to the house of the +friend with whom she was staying. On hearing that I had come, she +desired to see me alone. I felt more nervous than I had ever done in my +life before, supposing that she would give way to her sorrow, and that +it would be incumbent on me to endeavour to console her, impossible as +that might be. What to say, indeed, I knew not. + +I found her dressed in mourning for her father, and looking very pale. +She was seated, but she rose when I entered, and advancing towards me, +took my hand. Her eye fell on the sword, then on the ring on my finger. + +"I know what you have to tell me, Duncan," she said in a deep-toned +voice, but without a falter; "he died as I would have had him,--fighting +bravely for the freedom of his country--for the same cause to which I +dedicated my life. Give me that weapon: I would present it to you, but +I must use it myself; not to avenge his death, but to take his place and +wield it against the foes of Freedom. That ring--give it me; he sends +it as a farewell token." She placed it on her finger. "Now, tell me +the particulars." + +I endeavoured to describe the circumstances of Juan's death, and how he +had held the fort until all hope had gone. + +She had remained standing during the time of our interview. + +"Farewell, Duncan," she said at last. "I must prepare for a sterner +life than I have hitherto led. As yet it has been one suited to a +delicate creature like Dona Paula Salabariata--a mere scribe, +endeavouring to incite others to do the task I should undertake myself." + +I took my leave of Dona Dolores; and the next morning we heard that, +attended by two servants, she had set out, habited in half-military +costume, for the army. Some time passed before we heard of her again. +She had joined a regiment, and taken part in every action. She seemed +to bear a charmed life, too, for, although always in the thickest of the +fight, the bullets passed her harmlessly by. + +Years have rolled on since then, and the cause of Liberty has triumphed. +When peace was obtained, I married my so-called cousin, the fair-haired +Rosa; and my dear little sister became the wife of a gallant English +officer who settled in the country. + +I have described these scenes of warfare, not for the sake of +encouraging a love of fighting, but for a very contrary object; and from +the horrors I witnessed during that period, I am convinced that War is +the greatest curse that can afflict a country, and I earnestly pray that +the reign of Peace may soon commence on earth. + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of In New Granada, by W.H.G. Kingston + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK IN NEW GRANADA *** + +***** This file should be named 21401.txt or 21401.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/4/0/21401/ + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |